Avaya 555 231 743 GuestWorks And DEFINITY ECS Release 9 Technician Handbook For Hospitality Installations User Manual To The 6b69decd 6c4f 4bb1 8352 F800b106d285
User Manual: Avaya 555-231-743 to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 274 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- ==============
- MAIN MENU
- MASTER INDEX
- GLOSSARY
- ==============
- GuestWorks® and DEFINITY® ECS Release 9 Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
- Contents
- About This Handbook
- Hospitality Features
- Installing the System
- Overview
- Installation Checklist
- Additional Parts and Test Equipment
- Planning and Preparing the Site
- Unpacking the Equipment
- Installing and Connecting the Equipment
- Installing Telecommunications Cabling
- Installing the Management Terminal
- Activating the Systems
- Setting Up the Initial Options
- Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
- Overall Hospitality Connectivity
- Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP)
- Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (X.25)
- Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (Mode Code Integration)
- Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Port Connections
- INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link
- Switch-to-Call Accounting Links
- INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
- Xiox Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
- Switch-to-PMS Link
- Journal/PMS Log or System Printer Connections
- Printer Connection on the INTUITY
- Switch-to-INADS Connections
- MAP Remote Access Connections
- Translations and Testing
- Checklist
- Miscellaneous Translations
- Time of Day and Date (INTUITY)
- Dial by Name Special Application (Switch)
- Dial Plan (Switch)
- Dial Plan (INTUITY)
- Feature Access Codes (Switch)
- Class of Service (Switch)
- Class of Restriction (Switch)
- Class of Service (INTUITY)
- System Parameters (INTUITY)
- Fax Parameters (Switch and INTUITY)
- Abbreviated Dialing Lists (Switch)
- Listed Directory Numbers (Switch)
- Attendant Console (Switch)
- Attendant Console Button Layouts (Switch)
- Attendant Backup (Switch)
- Office Staff, Front Desk, and Guest Services Telephones (Switch)
- Backup Telephone Button Layouts (Switch)
- Mailboxes for AUDIX Subscribers (INTUITY)
- Guest Room Telephones (Switch)
- Administering Analog Caller ID (Switch)
- Suite Telephones (Switch)
- Mailboxes for Guest Rooms (INTUITY)
- Recorded Announcements (Switch)
- Emergency Access to Attendant (Switch)
- Crisis Alert (Switch)
- Trunk Groups (Switch)
- Assigning DID Numbers to Guest Rooms (Switch)
- Automatic Wakeup Options (Switch)
- Call Vectoring (Switch)
- Attendant Vectoring (Switch)
- Dial by Name (Switch)
- Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Switch)
- Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
- Switch-to-INTUITY Messaging Link
- INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)
- Hunt Groups for INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)
- Extensions for Guest Message Retrieval (Switch)
- Call Coverage Path (Switch)
- INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (INTUITY)
- Services to Phone Number Mapping (INTUITY)
- Attendant and Administrator Passwords (INTUITY)
- Testing the Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Ports
- INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
- Switch-to-Call Accounting Translations
- INTUITY Lodging Call AccountingtoPMS Translations
- Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
- Printer Translations (Switch)
- Parallel Printer Translations (INTUITY)
- Customer Logins (Switch)
- Customer Logins (INTUITY)
- Security Notification (Switch)
- Save Translations (Switch)
- Create Backup (INTUITY)
- Continuing with the Switch Installation
- Appendixes
- Index
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
GuestWorks® and DEFINITY®
Enterprise Communications Server
Release 9
Technician Handbook for
Hospitality Installations
Copyright 2000, Avaya Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and
accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Preventing Toll Fraud
“Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an
unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent,
subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf). Be aware that there may
be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that, if toll fraud occurs, it can
result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.
Avaya Fraud Intervention
If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical
assistance or support, in the United States and Canada, call the Technical Service
Center's Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1-800-643-2353. Outside of the United
States and Canada, contact your Avaya representative.
Providing Telecommunications Security
Telecommunications security (of voice, data, and/or video communications) is the
prevention of any type of intrusion to (that is, either unauthorized or malicious
access to or use of your company's telecommunications equipment) by some party.
Your company's “telecommunications equipment” includes both this Avaya product
and any other voice/data/video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya
product (that is, “networked equipment”).
An “outside party” is anyone who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor,
or is not working on your company's behalf. Whereas, a “malicious party” is anyone
(including someone who may be otherwise authorized) who accesses your
telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent.
Such intrusions may be either to/through synchronous (time-multiplexed and/or
circuit-based) or asynchronous (character-, message-, or packet-based) equipment or
interfaces for reasons of:
• Utilization (of capabilities special to the accessed equipment)
• Theft (such as, of intellectual property, financial assets, or toll-facility
access)
• Eavesdropping (privacy invasions to humans)
• Mischief (troubling, but apparently innocuous, tampering)
• Harm (such as harmful tampering, data loss or alteration, regardless of
motive or intent)
Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your
system and/or its networked equipment. Also realize that, if such an intrusion should
occur, it could result in a variety of losses to your company (including but not
limited to, human/data privacy, intellectual property, material assets, financial
resources, labor costs, and/or legal costs).
Your Responsibility for Your Company’s Telecommunications Security
The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment
rests with you - an Avaya customer's system administrator, your telecommunications
peers, and your managers. Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired
knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to:
• Installation documents
• System administration documents
• Security documents
• Hardware-/software-based security tools
• Shared information between you and your peers
• Telecommunications security experts
To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment, you and your peers
should carefully program and configure your:
• Avaya-provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces
• Avaya-provided software applications, as well as their underlying
hardware/software platforms and interfaces
• Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products.
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 15: Class A Statement. This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interfer-
ence at his own expense.
Part 68: Network Registration Number. This equipment is registered with the
FCC in accordance with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. It is identified by FCC registra-
tion number AV1USA-43023-MF-E.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions
set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Commu-
nications.
Le Présent Appareil Nomérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la class A préscrites dans le regle-
ment sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications
du Canada.
Trademarks
AUDIX, DEFINITY, and GuestWorks are registered trademarks of Avaya and
Lucent Technologies.
Comsphere is a registered trademark of Paradyne Corp.
GuideBuilder, INTUITY, and ProLogix are trademarks of Avaya and Lucent Tech-
nologies.
Okidata is a registered trademark of OKI Electric Co., LTD.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed
exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Xiox is a trademark of @Comm Corporation.
Ordering Information
Call: Avaya Publications Center
U.S. Voice: 1 888 582 3688
U.S. Fax: 1 800 566 9568
Canada Voice: +1 317 322 6619
Europe, Middle East, Africa Voice: +1 317 322 6416
Asia, China, Pacific Region, Caribbean,
Latin America Voice: +1 317 322 6411
Non-U.S. Fax: +1 317 322 6699
Write: Avaya Publications Center
2855 N. Franklin Road
Indianapolis, IN 46219
U.S.A.
Order: Document No. 555-231-743
Issue 1, November 2000
For more information about Avaya documents, refer to the section entitled “Related
Documents” in “About This Handbook.”
You can be placed on a Standing Order list for this and other documents you may
need. Standing Order will enable you to automatically receive updated versions of
individual documents or document sets, billed to account information that you pro-
vide. For more information on Standing Orders, or to be put on a list to receive
future issues of this document, please contact the Avaya Publications Center.
Technical Support
In the United States and Canada, Avaya technicians and customers should
call 1-800-242-2121, and dealer technicians should call 1-877-295-0099. Outside
the United States and Canada, Avaya technicians should contact their Center of
Excellence (COE), and customers and dealer technicians should contact their Avaya
authorized representative.
European Union Declaration of Conformity
The “CE” mark affixed to the equipment described in this book indicates that the
equipment conforms to the following European Union (EU) Directives:
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (89/336/EEC)
• Low Voltage (73/23/EEC)
• Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (TTE) i-CTR3 BRI and
i-CTR4 PRI
For more information on standards compliance, contact your local distributor.
Comments
To comment on this document, return the comment form.
Avaya Web Page
http://www.avaya.com
Acknowledgment
This document was prepared by the Information Development Organization for Glo-
bal Learning Solutions.
Intellectual property related to this product (including trademarks) and registered to
Lucent Technologies Inc. has been transferred or licensed to Avaya Inc.
Any reference within the text to Lucent Technologies Inc. or Lucent should be inter-
preted as references to Avaya Inc. The exception is cross references to books pub-
lished prior to April 1, 2001, which may retain their original Lucent titles.
Avaya Inc. formed as a result of Lucent’s planned restructuring, designs builds and
delivers voice, converged voice and data, customer relationship management, mes-
saging, multi-service networking and structured cabling products and services.
Avaya Labs is the research and development arm for the company.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
iii
Contents
Contents iii
About This Handbook xi
■Suggested Training xi
■Reasons for Issue xii
■Conventions xii
■Related Documents xiii
Hospitality Features 1
Installing the System 3
■Overview 3
■Installation Checklist 4
■Additional Parts and Test Equipment 5
■Planning and Preparing the Site 6
■Unpacking the Equipment 9
■Installing and Connecting the Equipment 9
■Installing Telecommunications Cabling 10
■Installing the Management Terminal 10
Connecting a PC to the Switch 11
Parts List 11
Cabling Diagram 11
■Activating the Systems 12
■Setting Up the Initial Options 12
■Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts 15
Overall Hospitality Connectivity 17
Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP) 19
Parts List 19
Distance Limits 19
Cabling Diagram 20
Crossover Wiring 21
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
iv
Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (X.25) 22
Parts List 22
Distance Limits 23
Cabling Diagram 23
Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (Mode Code
Integration) 24
Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Port Connections 25
Parts List 25
Distance Limits 26
Cabling Diagram 29
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link 30
Parts List 30
Distance Limits 30
Cabling Diagram 31
Test Procedure 33
Switch-to-Call Accounting Links 34
Co-Resident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting
Link Using the DCE Port 35
Parts List 35
Distance Limits 35
Cabling Diagram 36
Test Procedure 37
Xiox Call Accounting System Link Using
the DCE Port 39
Parts List 39
Distance Limits 39
Cabling Diagram 40
Test Procedure 41
Stand-alone Call Accounting System Link
Using the DCE Port 43
Parts List 43
Distance Limits 43
Cabling Diagram 43
Test Procedure 44
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
v
Switch-to-Call Accounting Link using DCP
Data Modules 46
Parts List 46
Distance Limits 47
Cabling Diagram 47
8400B Options 48
7400A Options 49
7400B Options 50
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS Link 51
Parts List 51
Distance Limits 51
Cabling Diagram 52
Xiox Call Accounting-to-PMS Link 53
Parts List 53
Distance Limits 53
Cabling Diagram 53
Switch-to-PMS Link 54
Parts List 54
Distance Limits 54
Cabling Diagram 55
8400B Options 56
7400A Options 57
7400B Options 58
Test Procedure 59
Journal/PMS Log or System Printer Connections 61
Parts List 61
Distance Limits 61
Cabling Diagram 62
8400B Options 63
7400A Options 64
7400B Options 65
Okidata Model ML321T Journal/PMS Log
Printer Options 66
Okidata Model ML321T System Printer Options 67
Test Procedure 69
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
vi
Printer Connection on the INTUITY 71
Parts List 71
Cabling Diagram 71
Switch-to-INADS Connections 72
Parts List 72
SCC and MCC 72
CMC 72
Cabling Diagram 73
INADS Registration 74
MAP Remote Access Connections 75
Parts List 75
Cabling Diagram 76
INADS Alarm Origination Download 77
Translations and Testing 79
■Checklist 80
■Miscellaneous Translations 81
Time of Day and Date (INTUITY) 82
Dial by Name Special Application (Switch) 83
Dial Plan (Switch) 84
Dial Plan (INTUITY) 85
Feature Access Codes (Switch) 86
Class of Service (Switch) 89
Class of Restriction (Switch) 91
Class of Service (INTUITY) 98
System Parameters (INTUITY) 99
Fax Parameters (Switch and INTUITY) 101
Billing Considerations When Forwarding Faxes 102
Abbreviated Dialing Lists (Switch) 103
Listed Directory Numbers (Switch) 104
Attendant Console (Switch) 105
Attendant Console Button Layouts (Switch) 106
Attendant Backup (Switch) 110
Office Staff, Front Desk, and Guest Services
Telephones (Switch) 113
Backup Telephone Button Layouts (Switch) 116
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
vii
Mailboxes for AUDIX Subscribers (INTUITY) 120
Guest Room Telephones (Switch) 121
Administering Analog Caller ID (Switch) 124
Administering Caller ID 124
Administering Caller ID Station Options 125
Suite Telephones (Switch) 126
Enabling Suite Check-In 127
Administering Station Hunting 127
Administering Station Hunt Before Coverage 128
Considerations 129
Mailboxes for Guest Rooms (INTUITY) 132
Recorded Announcements (Switch) 133
Emergency Access to Attendant (Switch) 137
Crisis Alert (Switch) 138
Trunk Groups (Switch) 142
Assigning DID Numbers to Guest Rooms (Switch) 143
Enabling Automatic and Custom Selection
of DID Numbers 144
Assigning the DID Numbers 145
Assigning DID Number Feature Buttons 146
Considerations 146
Automatic Wakeup Options (Switch) 148
Call Vectoring (Switch) 150
Attendant Vectoring (Switch) 152
Dial by Name (Switch) 153
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Switch) 156
■Switch-to-INTUITY Translations 157
Switch-to-INTUITY Messaging Link 157
TCP/IP Signaling 158
TCP/IP Link (Switch) 158
TCP/IP Link (INTUITY) 165
Testing the TCP/IP Link 169
X.25 Signaling 174
X.25 Link (Switch) 174
X.25 Link (INTUITY) 177
Testing the X.25 Link 179
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
viii
Mode Code Integration 181
Mode Code Integration Link (Switch) 181
Mode Code Integration (INTUITY) 182
INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch) 183
Hunt Groups for INTUITY AUDIX
Voice Ports (Switch) 186
Extensions for Guest Message Retrieval (Switch) 188
Call Coverage Path (Switch) 189
INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (INTUITY) 190
Services to Phone Number Mapping (INTUITY) 192
Attendant and Administrator Passwords (INTUITY) 193
Testing the Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Ports 194
■INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations 195
PMS Interface for GuestWorks 196
Stand-Alone Interface Link 198
Testing the INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link 201
■Switch-to-Call Accounting Translations 205
Link Parameters (INTUITY) 205
CDR Parameters (Switch) 205
Testing the Switch-to-Call Accounting Link 206
■INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting-to-PMS Translations 207
Testing the INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting-to-PMS Link 207
■Switch-to-PMS Link Translations 208
Hospitality Parameters 208
Link Connectivity Administration 212
Network Control (Netcon) Data Module 212
Data Modules 213
Housekeeping Status 213
Controlled Restrictions 215
Testing the Switch-to-PMS Link 216
Switch-to-PMS Link Testing with the
RS232 Mini-Tester 217
Netcon and Data Module Testing 219
PMS Testing and Status 220
Database Swap Testing 221
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
ix
Check-In and Check-Out Testing 222
Message Waiting Testing 223
Controlled Restrictions Testing 226
Housekeeping Status Testing 227
■Printer Translations (Switch) 228
Testing the Journal/PMS Log or System Printer 231
■Parallel Printer Translations (INTUITY) 233
■Customer Logins (Switch) 233
■Customer Logins (INTUITY) 233
■Security Notification (Switch) 234
■Save Translations (Switch) 235
■Create Backup (INTUITY) 235
Continuing with the Switch Installation 237
■Testing the Switch 237
■Installing and Wiring Telephones and Other Equipment 237
■Testing Telephones and Other Equipment 238
■Customer Turnover 238
■Maintenance 239
Appendixes 241
■Appendix A — Parts List 242
■Appendix B — Connector Pinouts 244
■Appendix C — List PMS Down Events 245
■Appendix D — Homisco Call Record Format 248
■Appendix E — Xiox Call Accounting Format 249
Index 251
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743
Issue 1
November 2000
Contents
x
About This Handbook
xiSuggested Training
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
About This Handbook
This handbook provides instructions for installing GuestWorks® and DEFINITY®
Enterprise Communications Server (ECS) switches in a hospitality solution. The
procedures in this handbook describe how to connect the switch and adjuncts
used in a hospitality solution, and how to administer the switch so it operates with
the adjuncts in a hospitality solution. The information provided in this handbook
includes information about preparing the site, unpacking and installing the
cabinets, connecting cabling and adjuncts, translating the switch and adjuncts,
and activating and testing the switch.
The information in this handbook can be used with any of the following switches
when the switches are optioned for hospitality services:
■GuestWorks
■DEFINITY ECS
■ProLogix™
■DEFINITY Business Communications System (BCS).
Suggested Training
It is suggested that technicians installing this equipment receive training on
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9 (R9) before installing this equipment.
Except for connectivity of hospitality adjuncts and translations of those adjuncts,
this handbook contains high-level reminders of the tasks required to install the
switch, and is not intended to replace normal switch training or standard switch
installation documents.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
About This Handbook
xiiReasons for Issue
Reasons for Issue
This document replaces the
GuestWorks Issue 6 Technician Handbook
(555-231-109) that is still valid on GuestWorks Issue 6 systems. This document is
issued for the following reasons:
■To update all information related to Release 9 of the DEFINITY ECS
software. GuestWorks now uses the same software release numbering as
DEFINITY ECS.
■To update information about the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) messaging connectivity between the switch and the
INTUITY™ voice messaging system.
■To add information about Custom Selection of VIP Direct Inward Dialing
(DID) Numbers.
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this handbook:
■In this handbook, the term “switch” refers to the telephone switching
equipment (GuestWorks, DEFINITY ECS, ProLogix, or DEFINITY BCS);
the term “INTUITY” refers to the voice messaging and call accounting
platform; and the term “PMS” refers to the Property Management System
provided by the customer.
■All screens shown in this handbook are approximations of how the actual
screens appear. Depending on the system options, the screens may vary.
■The terms “attendant console” and “backup telephone” are used in this
document. The attendant console is the model 302 that is usually found at
the front desk. The preferred backup telephone is the model 6424 or 8434
telephone with attendant-type feature buttons. The model 6408 or 8410
can be used as a secondary backup to the model 6424 or 8434.
■For most hospitality installations, the MAP/5P is the voice messaging
platform of choice. For very large installations that require more voice ports
or message storage, the MAP/40P or MAP/100 may be used. Unless
otherwise noted, the term “MAP” refers to any of the different platforms.
Any differences between the platforms (other than capacities) will be noted
in this handbook.
■This handbook documents two versions of the INTUITY system —
Release 4.4 (R4.4) and Release 5 (R5). Unless otherwise specified, all
connectivity and administration applies to either release.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
About This Handbook
xiiiRelated Documents
■Administration command paths and options you enter in the administration
fields are shown as follows:
change system-parameters hospitality
Some administration command paths have additional actions available
(such as change, list, add, and display). In this document, only the sug-
gested action is shown in the administration sections.
■Field names referring to the administration screens are shown as follows:
Queue Length
■On the cabling diagrams, the << and >> symbols are used to show the
plug-receptacle relationship. If this relationship is not known, the diagrams
show a rectangular box.
■Switch hardware is offered on the compact modular cabinet (CMC), the
single-carrier cabinet (SCC), or the multi-carrier cabinet (MCC) platforms.
Specific cabinet models will not be mentioned except when necessary.
Refer to the installation document for the cabinet type you are installing.
■Switch software is packaged for
csi
,
si
, or
r
systems. The
csi
system uses
CMC hardware, the
si
system uses SCC or MCC hardware, and the
r
system uses MCC hardware.
Related Documents
The following documents will be useful when installing a hospitality solution. Most
of these documents are included on the Documentation Library CDs shipped with
the system.
■555-015-201 —
DEFINITY Terminals and Adjuncts Reference
■555-020-706 —
7400A Data Module User Guide
■555-020-707 —
7400B Data Module User Guide
■555-020-709 —
8400B Plus Data Module User’s Guide
■555-025-600 —
BCS Products Security Handbook
■555-230-700 —
DEFINITY ECS Console Operations
■555-230-755 —
GuideBuilder Software for DEFINITY Telephones
■555-230-890 —
DEFINITY ECS Console Operations Quick Reference
■555-231-104 —
GuestWorks Technician Connectivity Training
(video tape)
■555-231-205 —
GuestWorks INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting User’s
Guide
■555-231-601 —
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Property Management
System Interface Specifications
■555-231-744 —
DEFINITY Business Communications System and
GuestWorks Release 9 Call Vectoring Guide
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
About This Handbook
xivRelated Documents
■555-233-114 —
DEFINITY ECS Installation and Test for Multi-Carrier
Cabinets
■555-233-115 —
DEFINITY ECS Upgrades and Additions for R9r
■555-233-116 —
DEFINITY ECS Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals
■555-233-117 —
DEFINITY ECS Maintenance for R9r
■555-233-118 —
DEFINITY
ECS Installation, Upgrades and Additions for
Compact Modular Cabinets
■555-233-119 —
DEFINITY ECS Maintenance for R9csi
■555-233-120 —
DEFINITY ECS Installation and Test for Single-Carrier
Cabinets
■555-233-122 —
DEFINITY ECS Upgrades and Additions for R8si
■555-233-123 —
DEFINITY ECS Maintenance for R9si
■555-233-200 —
DEFINITY ECS System Description
■555-233-763 —
DEFINITY ECS Release 9.1 Change Description
■555-233-766 —
DEFINITY ECS What’s New for Release 9
■555-233-506 —
DEFINITY ECS Administrator’s Guide
■555-233-705 —
Using the New Abbreviated Dialing Program Feature
■555-233-742 —
GuestWorks
and
DEFINITY ECS Release 9 Hospitality
Operations
■555-233-756 —
DEFINITY System’s Little Instruction Book for Basic
Administration
■555-233-757 —
DEFINITY System’s Little Instruction Book for Advanced
Administration
■555-233-758 —
DEFINITY System’s Little Instruction Book for Basic
Diagnostics
■555-233-767 —
DEFINITY ECS Release 9 Overview
■555-233-816 —
DEFINITY ECS Release 9 Documentation Library
(CD)
■585-310-169 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/40 and
MAP/40s System Installation
■585-310-170 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 System
Installation Worksheets
■585-310-171 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/40
Maintenance
■585-310-173 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/100
System Installation
■585-310-174 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/100
Maintenance
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
About This Handbook
xvRelated Documents
■585-310-185 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/5P System
Installation
■585-310-186 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/5P
Maintenance
■585-310-196 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/40P
System Installation
■585-310-197 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/40P
Maintenance
■585-310-234 —
INTUITY Lodging Property Management Specifications
■585-310-257 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Integration with System 75,
DEFINITY Generics 1 & 3, and R5/6
■585-310-564 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 Administration
■585-310-577 —
INTUITY Lodging Release 4 Administration
■585-310-745 —
GuideBuilder Software for AUDIX System
■585-313-401 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 Supplement for
Technicians
■585-313-602 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 Using a LAN to
Integrate with DEFINITY ECS
■585-313-604 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Using a LAN to
Integrate with DEFINITY ECS
■585-313-807 —
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation
(CD)
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
About This Handbook
xviRelated Documents
Hospitality Features
1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Hospitality Features
DEFINITY now has different offer categories for customers. Offer Category A
contains all possible DEFINITY features and is used by the DEFINITY ECS and
ProLogix products. Offer Category B contains a subset of Offer Category A
features used by the GuestWorks and DEFINITY BCS products. The following is
an abbreviated list of the hospitality features most likely to be used in your
installation:
■Analog Station Caller ID
■Answer Detection
■ASCII Data Over the Switch-to-Property Management System (PMS) Link
■Attendant Backup
■Attendant Split Swap
■Authorization Codes
■Automated Attendant
■Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)
■Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
■Automatic Selection of DID Numbers
■Attendant-activated Automatic Wakeup Service
■Attendant-activated Do Not Disturb
■Basic Call Management System (BCMS)
■Busy Verification
■Call Vectoring (requires the TN750C circuit pack when using Call Vectoring
for the Automated Attendant feature)
■Check-in/Check-out
■Controlled Restrictions
■Crisis Alert to attendant console, display station, or digital pager
■Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers (new for R9)
■Daily Wakeup
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Hospitality Features
2
■Dial by Name (only available on GuestWorks or DEFINITY BCS)
■Dual Wakeup
■Emergency Access to the Attendant
■Guest-activated Automatic Wakeup (requires a speech synthesizer circuit
pack)
■Guest-activated Do Not Disturb (requires a speech synthesizer circuit
pack)
■Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) access using Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephones and adjuncts
■Maid Status
■Message Waiting Lamps, either light-emitting diode (LED) or neon, on
guest room telephones
■Names Registration
■PMS Interface
■Recorded Announcements (requires the TN750C circuit pack)
■Room Status
■Station Self-Display
■Suite Check-In
■Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration
NOTE:
If your installation is using the Mode Code Integration feature,
the Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration feature is not an
option.
■Terminal Translation Initialization
■Trunk Identification
■VIP Wakeup
■Wakeup Activation via Tones
NOTE:
If Wakeup Activation via Tones is enabled, the wakeup feature
provided by a speech synthesizer circuit pack is disabled from
service.
■World Class Routing (WCR).
Installing the System
3Overview
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
This section describes the procedures you must use to install the components of a
hospitality solution.
Overview
Before you connect the switch to the hospitality adjuncts (see “Connecting the
Hospitality Adjuncts” on page 15), you must first install the basic switch equipment
and, if purchased, install the INTUITY voice messaging system. Use the following
documents when installing the switch and voice messaging equipment:
■
DEFINITY ECS Installation, Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular
Cabinets
■
DEFINITY ECS Installation and Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets
■
DEFINITY ECS Installation and Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets
■
DEFINITY ECS Change Description
■
DEFINITY ECS Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/5P System Installation
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/40P System Installation
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/40 and MAP/40s System
Installation
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/100 System Installation
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation (CD).
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
4Installation Checklist
Installation Checklist
The following is a brief checklist of the tasks required to install and translate a
hospitality solution.
Table 1. Installation Checklist
✔Procedure Begins
on...
Verify parts and test equipment page 5
Plan and prepare the site page 6
Unpack the equipment page 9
Install and connect the equipment page 9
Install telecommunications cabling page 10
Install the management interface page 10
Activate the systems page 12
Set up the initial options page 12
Connect and test the hospitality adjuncts page 15
Miscellaneous translations and testing page 81
Switch-to-INTUITY translations and testing page 157
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS translations and testing page 195
Switch-to-Call Accounting translations and testing page 205
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS translations and
testing page 207
Switch-to-PMS link translations and testing page 208
Printer translations and testing page 228
Logins, security, and backups page 233
General switch testing page 237
Install and wire telephones and other equipment page 237
Test telephones and other equipment page 238
Turn the switch over to the customer page 238
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
5Additional Parts and Test Equipment
Additional Parts and Test Equipment
Other than the tools and test equipment noted in the installation manuals, you
should also have the following items available on site:
■RS232 mini-tester (comcode 407515139)
NOTE:
The mini-tester shows positive voltage with a green LED and
negative voltage with a red LED. This can be verified by
connecting the mini-tester to a printer’s EIA port, adding power
to the printer, and then putting the printer on-line. The Data
Terminal Ready (DTR) lamp should then light with a positive
(green) voltage. You may already have your own mini-tester that
shows positive voltage as red and negative voltage as green. If
this is true at your installation, the mini-tester result diagrams
shown in this handbook must be read from an “opposite”
perspective; that is, if the book shows that DTR should be green,
and you have a mini-tester that operates in an “opposite” mode,
your mini-tester will show DTR being red. This change in
perspective should be true for all data leads.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove
the mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-
tester in-line during actual operation.
■RS232 gender changers and M25A or M25B RS232 cables
■Analog line used to place test calls.
See “Appendix A — Parts List” on page 242 for a list of the parts used for this
installation. Part numbers are provided in case replacements must be ordered.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
6Planning and Preparing the Site
Planning and Preparing the Site
See Chapter 1 in the DEFINITY ECS and INTUITY installation documents for
more information about the tasks in this section.
1. Inventory the equipment delivered to the customer site and verify that it
matches the customer’s order. If the equipment does not match the
customer’s order, follow the appropriate claims process or report the
discrepancies to your Avaya representative. If this is a dealer-installed site,
report the discrepancies to the dealer.
The equipment may include the following:
■Switch cabinets and circuit packs
■Default translation card (GuestWorks and DEFINITY BCS only)
Unless instructed otherwise, always use the default translation card.
■DEFINITY Site Administration (DSA) software (provided for the
customer’s PC), or a 715 management terminal
■Multi-Application Platform (MAP) for INTUITY Lodging Voice
Messaging, INTUITY AUDIX Voice Messaging, and INTUITY
Lodging Call Accounting
When using the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting from Homisco,
share “Appendix D — Homisco Call Record Format” on page 248
with the PMS vendor before or during the switch integration.
■Xiox™ call accounting equipment, which will be software, a buffer
box, and a PC
Call Xiox technical support at +1-480-970-9015, +1-602-970-9015,
+1-603-624-4424, or +1-650-548-5200 if any issues arise about
their call accounting equipment or installation support.
■Attendant console
■Multiappearance telephones (usually the 6400-series
or 8400-series; a 6424 or 8434 is recommended as the primary
attendant backup telephone)
■Guest room telephones
If custom room telephones and faceplates are being ordered,
coordinate the translations on the switch with any special feature
access buttons being programmed by the vendor. If programming is
done ahead of time, this could save time at installation.
■Modems
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
7Planning and Preparing the Site
■Printers
The Okidata® Models 320, 321, and 184T are often used for
hospitality installations, but be aware that other printers may be
delivered on site.
■Miscellaneous equipment.
■If the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting co-resident application from
Homisco has been ordered, part of the miscellaneous equipment is
a set of adapters, cables, and user documentation used with the
INTUITY system. This equipment is packaged in a separate box
with the INTUITY equipment and is labeled “Hold for Homisco
Technicians - Do Not Discard!” Save this equipment for the Homisco
technicians.
2. Locate the equipment room and lay out the equipment room floor plan. If
possible, use standard floor plans as described in
DEFINITY ECS System
Description
. When laying out the equipment locations, consider the
following:
■The switch-to-MAP link distance limitations depend on whether you
are using Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP),
X.25, or Mode Code:
— The TCP/IP link using the crossover cord is 328 feet (100
meters). This is the default configuration.
— The TCP/IP link using a 10/100base-T auto-sensing hub or
router is 656 feet (200 meters). This can be 328 feet (100
meters) on either side of the hub or router.
— The Isolating Data Interface (IDI) X.25 link must be 200 feet
(61 meters) or less. This link is used only on an upgraded
system if TCP/IP is not used. Duplicated
si
systems must use
data modules instead of IDI, so the distance limit is not an
issue.
— The Mode Code link is done over the same analog voice
ports connected between the switch and the voice messaging
adjunct. The analog ports have a distance limit of 20000 feet
(6100 meters). This connection is limited to upgraded
systems; the default configuration is TCP/IP.
■The link between the switch and the INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting on the MAP is limited to 50 feet (15.2 meters) unless you
use DCP data modules to extend the distance. When using a
stand-alone call accounting system, there is still the 50 foot (15.2
meter) limit that can be extended with DCP data modules.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
8Planning and Preparing the Site
■For the call accounting link, the MAP hardware must be within 50
feet (15.2 meters) of the PMS. This distance can be extended using
a pair of Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) data modules
connected through the switch.
Figure 2 on page 17 illustrates an overall view of a hospitality solution.
Additional equipment that you must consider when laying out the floor plan
includes the following:
■A customer-provided PC equipped with DSA, or a 715 management
terminal
■Cross-connect fields
■Space requirements and room layout
■Cable slack manager.
3. Lay out and ensure appropriate power for the switch and the management
terminal in the equipment room, and arrange for an electrician to install.
4. Lay out and ensure appropriate grounding in the equipment room,
including provisions for a coupled bonding conductor (CBC).
5. Determine the location of equipment closets where feeder cables can be
terminated.
6. Determine where external trunk lines come into the building and where
external trunk converters and adapters will be installed.
7. Determine an appropriate available port circuit on the switch for each
telephone, trunk, and peripheral connection needed, and create a
provisioning plan based on standard procedures.
8. Have the customer contact the PMS vendor and, if not using the INTUITY
Lodging Call Accounting, the call accounting system vendor to find out if
there are any special connections required to interface with their
equipment. It is highly recommended that the customer schedule the
vendors to be on-site when the connections are made and the testing is
done for the PMS and the call accounting. If the vendors cannot be on-site,
they should at least be available by telephone.
9. If this is an upgrade from an existing system, remind the customer that
during the cutover, all Automatic Wakeup requests and Do Not Disturb
requests must be noted manually. After the cutover is complete, the
customer must manually input these requests.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
9Unpacking the Equipment
Unpacking the Equipment
!CAUTION:
Lifting and moving the switch cabinets may require two people. The average
weight of a CMC is 50 pounds (23 kilograms); an SCC is 125 pounds (60
kilograms); and the MCC is 800 pounds (268 kilograms). Use caution to
avoid injury.
See Chapter 1 in the DEFINITY ECS installation documents and Chapter 2 in the
INTUITY installation documents for more information about the tasks in this
section.
1. Unpack the equipment.
2. Inspect the equipment for any damage. Report any damages according to
local procedures.
3. Ensure that all circuit packs are fully inserted into the proper slots
according to the Customer Service Document (CSD). Report any
discrepancies to your Avaya representative or authorized dealer.
Installing and Connecting the
Equipment
See the appropriate installation document for information about installing and
connecting the equipment:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
■For installations with an INTUITY system, see Chapters 2 through 4 in the
INTUITY installation documents.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
10Installing Telecommunications Cabling
Installing Telecommunications
Cabling
See the appropriate installation document for information about installing
telecommunications cabling:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 2 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 2 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets
.
Installing the Management Terminal
The management terminal for administration on either the switch or the INTUITY
system can be either a customer-provided PC loaded with the DSA software, or a
dedicated management terminal, which must be purchased separately. It is the
customer’s responsibility to set up his or her PC with DSA, but the technicians are
responsible for connecting and setting up the 715 management terminal if it was
purchased for the system. Use the customer’s PC, your own laptop PC, or the
management terminal to access the switch for administration during the
installation.
See the appropriate installation document for information about installing the
management terminal:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 3 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 3 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
■For installations with an INTUITY system, see Chapter 4 in the INTUITY
installation documents.
The following section shows how to connect a PC to the switch.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
11Installing the Management Terminal
Connecting a PC to the Switch
Use the on-line help for DSA to set the communication options on the PC.
Parts List
■PC with keyboard and monitor
■One M25A or M25B RS232 cable (or equivalent 25-pin straight-through
cable); see “Appendix A — Parts List” on page 242.
■One 9-pin to 25-pin transition cable (if using a 9-pin COM port)
(comcode 847106945)
■Gender changers, as needed.
Cabling Diagram
Figure 1. Direct PC Connection to the Switch
TERM (J3) (csi),
TERM or DOT (si), or
TERMINAL ACTIVE (r)
Switch
PC M25A or
M25B
RS232
Cable
9-pin to
25-pin
Cable
(optional)
COM
Port »
pc2serv.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
12Activating the Systems
Activating the Systems
See the appropriate installation document for information about activating the
switch and the INTUITY system:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 3 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 3 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
■For installations with an INTUITY system, see Chapter 4 in the INTUITY
installation documents.
Unless instructed otherwise,
always
activate your system using the default
translation card.
Setting Up the Initial Options
After activating the systems, there are some initial administration options you
must set up. In addition to the procedures given in this section, see the
appropriate installation document for information about setting up the initial
options:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 3 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 3 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets.
■For installations with an INTUITY system, see Chapter 5 in the INTUITY
installation documents.
NOTE:
Before setting any options, ensure that the default translation card is being
used on a GuestWorks or DEFINITY BCS switch. A default translation card
is not used on a DEFINITY ECS or ProLogix switch.
Do the following to set up the initial options:
1. After the switch powers up, log on to the switch using the craft login ID
and the crftpw password. Distributors should use the dadmin login ID.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
13Setting Up the Initial Options
2. Before you do any administration, verify that you are using the correct
translation card. For a DEFINITY ECS or ProLogix system, you will start
with a blank card, and all options must be set on site. For GuestWorks and
DEFINITY BCS, there is a default translation card that is already
administered for Offer Category B with certain default options. Check this
by using the display system-parameters offer-options command.
NOTE:
If the Offer Category is not set correctly and activated, contact
the technical support group or your regional Center of
Excellence (COE). The switch must be set to the correct Offer
Category; the translations must be saved; and the switch must
be reset before you can do any translations.
3. Set the required country options using the change system-parameters
country-options command.
4. Set the daylight savings time rules using the change daylight-savings-
rules command.
5. Set the date and the time using the set time command. This includes
applying the daylight savings time rules set up in Step 4.
6. If the switch has EPNs in different time zone locations, use the change
location command to set the time zone offset, daylight savings rules, and
numbering plan area code.
7. Set the switch maintenance parameters using the change system-
parameters maintenance command. For
csi
systems that have a C-LAN
(TN799C) circuit pack, use Page 2 of this screen to verify that the Bus
Bridge Packet Interface 2 has been enabled for the C-LAN circuit pack. If it
is not already assigned, enter the C-LAN circuit pack equipment location,
and use the defaults for the Timeslot Port fields as shown below.
change system-parameter maintenance Page 2 of 4
MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification )
TTRs: 4 CPTRs: 1 Call Classifier Ports:
MMIs: 0 VCs:
TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST (Extension)
Test Type 100: Test Type 102: Test Type 105:
ISDN MAINTENANCE
ISDN-PRI TEST CALL Extension: ISDN BRI Service SPID:
DS1 MAINTENANCE
DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension:
SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS
Packet Intf1? y Packet Intf2? y
Bus Bridge: 03C05 Inter-Board Link Timeslots Pt0: 6 Pt1: 1 Pt2: 1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
14Setting Up the Initial Options
8. Verify that the hospitality customer options have been enabled by checking
the display system-parameters customer-options screen. On Page 3,
the following options must be enabled:
■Hospitality (Basic)
■Hospitality (G3V3 Enhancements)
These options can be enabled only with the
init
login ID. Contact technical
support or your COE if you do not have permission to make this change.
9. Change the craft password using the change password craft command.
!CAUTION:
After the craft password is changed, the new password must be
safeguarded to prevent unauthorized administration changes.
This password MUST NOT BE REVEALED to the customer.
10. Save these initial translations. Use the save translation command. Label
the translation card with the current date and switch name.
!CAUTION:
It is recommended that you save your translations regularly
during the installation process. If a power failure occurs, all
translations since the last save are lost and must be
readministered.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
15Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
The hospitality adjuncts include the following:
■INTUITY Lodging Voice Messaging
INTUITY Lodging Voice Messaging is an optional adjunct that resides on
the MAP. INTUITY Lodging is used for the guest access to voice
messages; and INTUITY AUDIX is used for the office staff to access voice
messaging.
■INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting is a co-resident application from
Homisco that resides on the MAP. It is based on a product from the
Homisco Corporation. At most installations, you can expect a technician
from Homisco to be on site to install the software and hardware for the call
accounting portion of the product. The Homisco technician will assist you in
making the call accounting system interface to the switch.
For installations that include INTUITY Lodging Voice Messaging and
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting, all connections are shown in complete
detail.
■Stand-Alone Call Accounting
Stand-alone call accounting systems (such as Xiox) can be installed if the
call record format is compatible with the switch. Two typical formats are
printer
and
Teleseer
.
For installations that include voice mail or call accounting from another
vendor, the connections are shown up to a definable demarcation point.
Connections beyond that demarcation point must be coordinated with the
vendor.
■Property Management System (PMS)
The PMS is a vendor-provided product that interfaces to the switch
according to the
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Property Management
System Interface Specifications
. If the PMS follows those specifications,
the PMS will interface to the switch when properly connected to the switch.
The PMS connections are shown up to a definable demarcation point.
Connections beyond that demarcation point must be coordinated with the
vendor.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
16Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
■Printers
Two serial printers can be installed to print hospitality reports and to keep a
log of events as they occur on the switch. Each printer connects to the
switch using a DCP data module. The printers are designated as either a
“journal/schedule” printer or a “log” printer. The journal/schedule printer
records Emergency Access to Attendant calls and Automatic Wakeup calls.
The log printer records housekeeping updates when the PMS link is down,
in addition to recording any other PMS-related events. These PMS events
are shown in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
NOTE:
In most cases, only one printer is provided to perform both the
journal/schedule and log printer functions.
A parallel printer may be connected to the INTUITY system to run call
accounting reports or reports from the INTUITY messaging system.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
17Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Overall Hospitality Connectivity
Figure 2 shows the overall connectivity for a hospitality installation when using the
MAP for INTUITY Lodging Voice Messaging, INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting,
plus connections to a PMS. References to the detailed connectivity drawings are
shown in this figure. Table 2 also gives references to the detailed connectivity
drawings based on the equipment you are installing.
Figure 2. Overall Hospitality Connectivity
Console
Optional
System or
Journal
Serial
Printer
Digital
Sets
Analog
Sets
TN765 (si)
TN577 (r)
LAN
Card
TN799
C-LAN
EIA DCE
(csi/si)
Analog
Line
Analog
Line
Digital
Line
Digital
Line
Digital
Line
Modem
P2 (CMC)
Digital
Line
AUX
(SCC or
MCC)
Switch
DCIU
Card
COM1
T/R
Card
COM2
RMB
Printer
Port
MAP
OR
Fig. 6
Fig.3or4
Fig. 9
Fig. 12
(See Fig. 13-15
for additional
CDR connectivity
options)
Fig. 19
Fig. 22
Fig. 16 Fig. 10*
Fig. 20
* This link is not used with the Switch/Intuity/PMS
Link Integration feature. This link is required
when using Mode Code Integration.
Fig. 23
Fig. 21
IDI
Crossover
Cable or
Hub/Router
Comsphere
3820
Comsphere
3820
Parallel
Printer
Printer
Front Desk
Terminal
For
Remote
Admin
(Optional)
For
INADS
For
INADS
For
INADS
For
INADS
885A
Kit
X
C
O
N
715
or PC TERM
Fig. 1
Data
Module
Modem
Data
Module
PMS
Switch
Port
Voice
Msgng
Port
Call
Acctng
Port
X
C
O
N
X
C
O
N
Serial
Card
TTYsaa
Serial
Card
TTYsab
Serial
Card
TTYsac
X
C
O
N
X
C
O
N
X
C
O
N
gws_sol2.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
18Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Table 2. Matrix for Cabling Diagrams
In Figure 2, there are a variety of digital line circuit packs and telephones/data
modules that can be used. Table 3 shows which circuit packs should be used to
support the different digital telephones and data modules.
From...
To...
Switch
INTUITY
Lodging
Voice
Messaging
INTUITY
Voice
Ports
INTUITY
Lodging
Call
Accounting
Xiox Call
Accounting
Stand-alone
Call
Accounting PMS
Switch Figure 3,
Figure 4,
Figure 6, or
Figure 9
Figure 9 Figure 12
or
Figure 15
Figure 13
or
Figure 15
Figure 14
or
Figure 15
Figure 18
INTUITY
Lodging
Voice
Messaging
Figure 3,
Figure 4,
Figure 6,
or
Figure 9
Figure 10
or
Figure 11*
INTUITY
Lodging
Call
Accounting
Figure 12
or
Figure 15
Figure 16
Xiox Call
Accounting Figure 13
or
Figure 15
Figure 17
Stand-alone
Call
Accounting
Figure 14
or
Figure 15
Designed
Locally
* This connection is not required when using the Switch/INTUITY/Link Integration feature.
Table 3. Digital Line Circuit Packs and Telephone Equipment Compatibility
Equipment
Circuit Packs
TN754C
(4-wire)
TN2181
(2-wire)
TN2214
(2-wire)
TN2224
(2-wire)
302B Console (2-wire/4-wire) Yes Yes Yes Yes
302C Console (2-wire/4-wire) Yes Yes Yes Yes
6400-Series telephones (2-wire) No Yes Yes Yes
7400-Series telephones/data modules
(4-wire) YesNoNoNo
8400-Series telephones/data modules
(2-wire/4-wire) Yes Yes Yes Yes
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
19Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP)
This data link transfers information to support the INTUITY AUDIX service for
office staff voice messaging. For all new installations, this is the recommended
way to connect the switch to the MAP for voice messaging administrative
messages. If the system is an upgrade, you may reuse the X.25 hardware for this
connection; see “Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (X.25)” on page 22. For
installations using Mode Code integration, see “Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link
(Mode Code Integration)” on page 24.
Parts List
■An ethernet port on the C-LAN circuit pack
■One 259A adapter (comcode 102631413), or
UTP Category 5 cross-connect hardware and connecting blocks
■One 6-inch RJ45 crossover cord (comcode 846943306 or 104154414), or
One 10/100Base-T auto-sensing LAN hub or customer router (optional)
■One or two RJ45 UTP Category 5 modular cords (see “Appendix A —
Parts List” on page 242)
■One or more 451A in-line RJ45 adapters, as needed (used to connect
modular cords together)
■One LAN card on the MAP (for INTUITY R4.4, model 8412; for INTUITY
R5, model 8416).
Distance Limits
Using the standard crossover cord (or alternate crossover wiring arrangement in
Figure 5), the distance limit between the switch and the MAP is 328 feet (100
meters).
Using a hub or customer router, the distance limit between the switch and the
MAP is 656 feet (200 meters) total [328 feet (100 meters) from the switch to the
hub or router, and 328 feet (100 meters) from the hub or router to the MAP]. If the
distance between the switch and the MAP is more than 656 feet (200 meters), you
can daisy-chain up to four separate hubs.
NOTE:
If you do locate the switch more than 50 feet (15.2 meters) from the MAP
and are using the coresident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting system on
the MAP, the call accounting link limit of 50 feet (15.2 meters) must be
taken into account. Figure 15 shows how the call accounting link can be
extended beyond that limit.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
20Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 3 shows a detailed connection between the C-LAN circuit pack and the
LAN card on the MAP when using the default crossover cord.
Figure 3. Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP) with Crossover Cord
Figure 4 shows a detailed connection between the C-LAN circuit pack and the
LAN card on the MAP when using the optional hub or customer router.
Figure 4. Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP) with Hub or Router
C-LAN
Switch
328 ft max
(100 m)
LAN
Card
MAP
OR Cat 5
Connecting
Block
Cat 5
Cross-
Connect
Field
Crossover Cord
Crossover
Cord
Cat 5
25-Pair
Cable
Cat 5
Wire
RJ45 Cat 5
Modular Cord
259A Adapter,
356A Adapter (Jack #1), or
258B Adapter (Jack #1)
lan_xover.cdr
C-LAN
Switch
Hub or
Router
328 ft max
(100 m) 328 ft max
(100 m)
AC Power
LAN
Card
MAP
OR Cat 5
Connecting
Block
Cat 5
Cross-
Connect
Field
RJ45 Cat 5
Modular Cord
RJ45 Cat 5
Modular Cord
RJ45 Cat 5
Modular Cord
Cat 5
25-Pair
Cable
Cat 5
Wire
259A Adapter,
356A Adapter (Jack #1), or
258B Adapter (Jack #1)
lan_ded.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
21Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
The C-LAN circuit pack ethernet lead designations are as follows:
Use this information when making connections from the using a 259A adapter
(single-port), a 356A adapter (8-port harmonica), a 258B adapter (6-port
harmonica), or standard cross-connect wiring. When using the 356A or 258B
adapters, you must always connect to jack #1 of the adapter.
Crossover Wiring
If the standard crossover cord or the optional hub/router are not available, you can
build your own crossover wiring arrangement to flip the transmit and receive leads
for the LAN connection. Figure 5 shows how this can be done with a 104A
connecting block (comcode 105164859). When using this device, the distance
limit from the switch to the INTUITY system is 328 feet (100 meters). Using this
device, you would connect one Category 5 modular cord to the switch C-LAN
circuit pack, and another Category 5 modular cord to the INTUITY LAN card.
Figure 5. Alternate Crossover Wiring
Lead
Name 25-Pair Cable
Wire Color
25-Pair
Cable
Connector
Pin-out
RJ45
Jack
Pin-out
Terminal Block
Pin-out on
Connecting Block
TD+ white/orange 27 1 3
TD- orange/white 2 2 4
RD+ white/green 28 3 5
RD- green/white 3 6 6
RJ45 RJ45
6
5
4
3
6
5
4
3
RD-
RD+
TD-
TD+
RD-
RD+
TD-
TD+
104A Connecting
Block
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
22Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (X.25)
This data link transfers information to support the INTUITY AUDIX service for
office staff voice messaging. This connection will be used only if:
■Your system has been upgraded from an earlier system, and
■The customer chooses to retain their X.25 hardware (a PI circuit pack is
needed on the
si
system, or a Packet Gateway circuit pack is needed on an
r
system) instead of the TCP/IP C-LAN hardware.
See “Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP)” on page 19. For installations using
Mode Code integration, see “Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (Mode Code
Integration)” on page 24.
NOTE:
The connectivity shown in this section will not work on an
si
system with
duplication. For a duplicated system, the connection between the switch
and the INTUITY is done with DCP data modules. See your project
manager for more information.
Parts List
■A PI port (TN765) on an
si
system, or a Packet Gateway port (TN577) on
an
r
system
■One H600-347 cable (
r
system only)
■One H600-210 Group 3 cable (50 feet; 15.2 meters)
■One 105C IDI (comcode 107422735) or 105D IDI (comcode 108367376)
An IDI provides electrical isolation and protection between the switch and
the INTUITY hardware. The dip switch settings on the IDI must be set for
“Direct Connect.”
■One ED1E434-11 Group 175 cable (4.5 feet; 1.5 meters)
■One DCIU card (comcode 406801647, J1P260AA, L31) installed in the
MAP, usually located in slot 1.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
23Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Distance Limits
The distance limit between the switch and the IDI is 200 feet (61 meters). If you
need a cable longer than the default 50 foot (15.2 meter) cable provided, order a
Group 4 cable (100 feet; 30.5 meters) or a Group 5 cable (200 feet; 61 meters).
See “Appendix A — Parts List” on page 242 for a list of cables.
NOTE:
If you locate the switch more than 50 feet (15.2 meters) from the MAP and
are using the coresident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting system on the
MAP, the call accounting link limit of 50 feet (15.2 meters) must be taken
into account. Figure 15 shows how the call accounting link can be extended
beyond this limit.
Cabling Diagram
Figure 6 shows a detailed connection between a Processor Interface (PI) switch
port (
si
system) or Packet Gateway (PGATE) switch port (
r
system) and the DCIU
card on the MAP.
Figure 6. Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (X.25)
TN765
PI
TN577
PGATE
DCIU
Card
Switch
MAP
In
(J1)
Or
Out
(J2)
50 Ft.
ED1E434-11
Group 175
Cable
H600-210
Group 3
Cable
H600-347
Cable
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
IDI
pi2gp.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
24Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (Mode Code
Integration)
When using Mode Code Integration, the administrative link between the switch
and the MAP (the link that transfers information to support the INTUITY AUDIX
service for office staff voice messaging) connects by way of an analog port on the
switch and a voice port on the MAP. This connection is the same as the voice port
connections shown in “Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Port Connections” on page 25
and in Figure 9.
In other words, the voice ports used for leaving and retrieving messages on the
INTUITY system are the same voice ports used for Mode Code Integration. This
means that the ports will be in use for the amount of time it takes to leave a
message, plus the amount of time it takes for the Mode Codes to exchange
messages between the switch and INTUITY. This will affect the traffic-handling of
the voice messaging system.
Mode Code Integration should not be used if TCP/IP or X.25 link integration is
available. See “Switch-to-INTUITY Admin Link (TCP/IP)” on page 19 or “Switch-
to-INTUITY Admin Link (X.25)” on page 22 for more information.
NOTE:
When using Mode Code Integration, you cannot take advantage of the
Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration feature. This means that you must
install the link shown in “INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link” on page 30.
Mode Code Integration between the switch and the MAP is described in more
detail in the following documents:
■
DEFINITY ECS Administrator’s Guide
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/5P System Installation
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Integration with System 75, DEFINITY
Generics 1 & 3, and R5/6
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation (CD).
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
25Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Port Connections
This connection is used for the following:
■For callers leaving messages for guests and office staff
■For guests and office staff to call the INTUITY system to retrieve their voice
messages
■For the administrative link between the switch and the MAP when using
Mode Code Integration (see page 24).
Parts List
■One or more Tip/Ring cards in the MAP (different cards are required within
different regions of the world)
— IVC6 (AYC-10) Analog Voice Card (comcode 106406580)
— IVC6A (AYC-29) Tip/Ring Card (comcode 107213944)
— NGTR (AYC-30) Next Generation Tip/Ring Card
(comcode 107224586)
Each Tip/Ring card supports six voice ports. For R5, you can have up to
three Tip/Ring cards to support 18 ports for voice messaging. For R4.4,
when using the Multi-Port Serial Card, you can have up to two Tip/Ring
cards to support 12 ports for voice messaging; when not using the
Multi-Port Serial Card, you can have up to three Tip/Ring cards to
support 18 ports for voice messaging.
If your system came from the factory configured with more than one tip/ring
card, the option settings on the cards should be set correctly. However, if
you are adding a card on-site, or if you want to check the card
configuration, Figure 7 shows the switch settings for the IVC6 (AYC-10)
and IVC6A (AYC-29) cards, and Figure 8 shows the switch settings for the
NGTR (AYC-30) card.
For each voice port card, you must install an 885A connector kit. Figure 9
shows connections for one kit using all six voice ports. Depending on the
customer’s order, you will install voice ports in pairs up to 18 ports.
■Two or more ED5P208-30 Group 16 modular cords
You need two cords for each Tip/Ring card.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
26Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
■One 885A connector kit for each Tip/Ring card installed in the MAP
(ED-5P907-70, Group 1, comcode 601419666)
These kits come with one 885A connecting block, six RJ11C 4-wire
modular cords (comcode 103732582), and two RJ25 6-wire modular cords.
!CAUTION:
The two RJ25 6-wire modular cords that come with the 885A
connector kits are not used in this application. Do not use the
RJ25 cords for any connections; the wiring in the RJ25 cords will
not work in this application.
Use the 885A connecting block label to record the extension numbers of
the voice ports connected to the MAP.
■Ferrites (one for each voice line) (comcode 407616846)
Ferrites are required for installation in some countries. See
INTUITY
Messaging Solution Release 4 Supplement for Technicians
for more
information.
■103A modular connecting blocks (one for each voice port)
(comcode 105164818)
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■Ports on an analog circuit pack.
Each analog circuit pack supports 8, 16, or 24 analog voice connections.
Depending on the circuit pack and the required number of voice ports, you
may need to spread out the voice port assignments over more than one
circuit pack. For example, if you are using a 16-port circuit pack, use no
more than four ports of circuits 1-8 and four ports of circuits 9-16 on that
circuit pack. If you still need more INTUITY voice ports, select a circuit pack
that is at least one-quarter carrier distance away from the first circuit pack.
For example, if your system has 12 voice ports, and you assign the first
eight ports to the circuit pack in slot 3, assign the other four voice ports to a
circuit pack in slot 7 or higher. See more about circuit pack characteristics
in the
DEFINITY ECS System Description
.
Distance Limits
The distance limit from an analog port to the MAP is 20000 feet (6100 meters)
using 24 AWG wire.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
27Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Figure 7. IVC6 and IVC6A Tip/Ring Card Switch Settings
8-pin
modular
jacks
Audio
input
Audio
output
TDM bus
terminator SIPs
Rocker
switches
(see IVC6
switch setting
figure)
Base I/O address = 100 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 0
First card installed
Base I/O address = 200 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 1
Second card installed
Base I/O address = 300 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 2
Third card installed
Base I/O address = 500 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 3
Fourth card installed
Base I/O address = 600 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 4
Fifth card installed
Base I/O address = 700 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 5
Sixth card installed
Base I/O address = 900 Hex.
IVC6 T/R 6
Seventh card installed
Rocker switches 5 and 6 can be
set either open or closed.
Note:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
28Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Figure 8. NGTR Tip/Ring Card Switch Settings
ngtr KLC 070296
I/O address switch
TDM bus B
TDM bus A
TDM bus terminator SIPs
8-pin
modular
jacks
Audio
output
Audio
input
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
29Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 9 shows the connections between analog circuit pack ports on the switch
and a Tip/Ring card on the MAP.
Figure 9. Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Port Connections
Analog
Line
Switch
Cross-Connect
Field
ED5P208-30
Group 16
Modular Cords
103A
Connecting
Blocks
RJ11C
4-Wire
Modular
Cords
IVP6#
885A ADAPTER
LINES
LINES
1-2-3
4-5-6
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3
LINE 4 LINE 5 LINE 6
EXT: EXT: EXT:
EXT: EXT: EXT:
Tip/Ring
Card
MAP
123
456
AUDIO
IN
OUT
m5_791.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
30Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link
This connection is used to activate and deactivate guest voice messaging
mailboxes when guests check-in and check-out.
NOTE:
If the Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration feature is used, this connection
is not required. See “INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations” on page 195
for more information about this feature. If Mode Code Integration is used,
this link is required and cannot be removed.
Parts List
■One Multi-Port Serial card on the MAP (comcode 407009406; J1P260AA1,
List 12)
For this connection, use the third port on the card. This port is not marked
on the card, but is administered in software as port TTYsac.
■One D6AP modular cord (comcode 102937604)
■One Equinox P/N:210068 DTE 10/10 adapter (DB25 DTE,
comcode 406983155); see “Appendix B — Connector Pinouts”
■One null modem with transmit/receive swapped (all other leads are
straight-through) (comcode 407122043)
■One RS232 cable (use gender changers as needed).
Distance Limits
The distance limit from the MAP to the PMS is 50 feet (15.2 meters).
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
31Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 10 shows the connection used for controlling guest mailboxes between the
MAP and the PMS. Use this connection when the MAP has a Multi-Port Serial
Card.
Figure 10. INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link (Multi-Port Serial Card)
.
MAP
PMS
Voice
Messaging
Port
D6AP
Modular
Cord
RS232 25-pin
Null Modem
T/R Swap Only
Equinox
P/N:210068
DTE 10/10
Adapter
RS232
Cable
Demarcation
Point
Multi-Port
Serial Card
TTYsac
50 Ft. Maximum
m5_pms2.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
32Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
For some installations, the connection used for controlling guest mailboxes
between the MAP and the PMS uses COM1 instead of the Multi-Port Serial Card.
Figure 11 shows this connection.
Figure 11. INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link (COM1)
.
MAP
PMS
Voice
Messaging
Port
RS232 25-pin
Null Modem
T/R Swap Only
RS232
Cable
Demarcation
Point
50 Ft. Maximum map_pms_com1.cdr
COM1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
33Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Test Procedure
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the link
where the Equinox adapter connects to the null modem as shown in Figure 10.
The leads marked with an asterisk are controlled by the INTUITY system, and the
PMS controls the other leads. Translations for this connection begin on page 195.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
With the mini-tester connected to only the Equinox adapter coming from the MAP,
the mini-tester should show the following:
With the mini-tester connected to only the PMS at the null modem, the mini-tester
should show the following:
With the mini-tester connected to the MAP and the PMS, but in an idle state, the
mini-tester should show the following:
TD*
RTS*
DTR*
RD
CTS
DSR
CD
dark
dark green
dark
red dark
dark
TD*
RTS*
DTR*
RD
CTS
DSR
CD
dark
red dark
red
dark
red
red
TD*
RTS*
DTR*
RD
CTS
DSR
CD
dark
red green
red
red
red
red
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
34Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-Call Accounting Links
The switch-to-call accounting link can be configured several different ways
depending on the ports used at the switch and the type of call accounting system.
This section describes the following call accounting configurations:
■Co-resident INTUITY Lodging call accounting system (Homisco) using the
DCE port
■Xiox call accounting system using the DCE port
■Stand-alone call accouting system using the DCE port
■Call accounting link using DCP data modules.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
35Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Co-Resident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting
Link Using the DCE Port
This connection is used to transfer Call Detail Recording (CDR) information to the
co-resident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting software (Homisco). This
connection is valid for a
csi
or
si
system.
Parts List
■The DCE port on the switch (this port is found on the Processor Interface
Cable of a
csi
system labeled as J2)
■One M25A RS232 cable (or equivalent straight-through cable)
(comcode 105193668)
■One Equinox P/N:210068 DTE 10/10 adapter (DB25 DTE,
comcode 406983155); see “Appendix B — Connector Pinouts”
■One D6AP modular cord (comcode 102937604)
■One Multi-Port Serial card on the MAP (comcode 407009406; J1P260AA1,
List 12).
For this connection, use the first port on the card. This port is not marked
on the card, but is administered in software as port TTYsaa.
Distance Limits
The distance limit from the switch to the MAP is 50 feet (15.2 meters). If the
distance from the switch and the MAP is more than 50 feet (15.2 meters), or if the
switch is an
r
system, see “Switch-to-Call Accounting Link using DCP Data
Modules” on page 46.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
36Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 12 shows the connection used to transfer CDR information between the
DCE port on a
csi
or
si
system and the MAP.
Figure 12. Co-Resident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting Link Using the
DCE Port
DCE (si)
DCE (J2) (csi)
Switch
Multi-Port
Serial Card
TTYsaa
MAP
50 Ft. Maximum
D6AP
Modular
Cord
Equinox
P/N:210068
DTE 10/10
Adapter
M25A
RS232
Cable
««
eia2map.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
37Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Test Procedure
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the link
where the Equinox adapter connects to the M25A cable as shown in Figure 12.
The leads marked with an asterisk are controlled by the switch, and the INTUITY
Lodging Call Accounting system controls the other leads. Translations for this
begin on page 205.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
With the mini-tester connected to only the M25A cable, the mini-tester should
show the following:
With the mini-tester connected to only the Equinox adapter, the mini-tester should
show the following:
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
dark
green dark
green
dark red
green
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
dark
red
red
green
dark
dark
dark
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
38Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
With the mini-tester connected to the M25A cable and the Equinox adapter, the
mini-tester should show the following (if any of the switch leads are dark on an
end-to-end connection, the processor circuit pack should be replaced):
Another way to test this connection is to connect a dumb terminal to the DCE port
on the switch, make some test calls, and look for call records being displayed on
the terminal.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
green
green
red
green
red
dark
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
39Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Xiox Call Accounting System Link Using
the DCE Port
This connection is used to transfer CDR information to the Xiox call accounting
system. This connection is valid for a
csi
or
si
system.
Parts List
■The DCE port on the switch (this port is found on the Processor Interface
Cable of a
csi
system labeled as J2)
■One M25A or M25B cable plus gender changers as needed (or
equivalent 25-pin straight-through cable) to connect from the DCE port to
the PBX port on the Xiox Intelligent Buffer unit
■Xiox Intelligent Buffer unit (includes AC power adapter and cable for
connection to the Xiox call accounting PC)
■Xiox call accounting PC.
Distance Limits
The distance limit from the switch to the Xiox call accounting PC is 50 feet (15.2
meters). If the distance from the switch and the PC is more than 50 feet (15.2
meters), or if the switch is an
r
system, see “Switch-to-Call Accounting Link using
DCP Data Modules” on page 46.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
40Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 13 shows the connection between the DCE port on a
csi
or
si
system and a
Xiox call accounting system.
Figure 13. Xiox Call Accounting System Link Using the DCE Port
DCE (si)
DCE (J2) (csi)
Switch
50 Ft. Maximum
Xiox Call
Accounting PC
COM1
xiox_ca.cdr
PBX RS232
Cable
PC
Xiox Intelligent
Buffer
M25A or
M25B RS232
Cable
«
Demarcation
Point
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
41Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Test Procedure
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the link
at the point where the M25 cable connects to the Xiox Intelligent Buffer as shown
in Figure 13. The leads marked with an asterisk are controlled by the switch, and
the call accounting system controls the other leads. Translations for this
connection begin on page 205.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
With the mini-tester connected to only the M25 cable from the switch, the mini-
tester should show the following:
With the mini-tester connected to only the PBX port on the Xiox Intelligent Buffer,
the mini-tester should show the following:
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
dark
dark
green
green
red
green
dark
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
dark
dark
dark
dark
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
42Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
With the mini-tester connected to the switch and the PBX port on the Xiox
Intelligent Buffer, the mini-tester should show the following (if any of the switch
leads are dark in an end-to-end connection, the processor circuit pack should be
replaced):
Another way to test this connection is to connect a dumb terminal to the DCE port
on the switch, make some test calls, and look for call records being displayed on
the terminal.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
green
green
red
green
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
43Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Stand-alone Call Accounting System Link
Using the DCE Port
This connection is used to transfer CDR information to a stand-alone call
accounting system. This connection is valid for a
csi
or
si
system.
Parts List
■The DCE port on the switch (this port is found on the Processor Interface
Cable of a
csi
system labeled as J2)
■One M25A or M25B cable plus gender changers as needed (or
equivalent 25-pin straight-through cable) to connect from the DCE port to
the interface port on the call accounting system.
Distance Limits
The distance limit from the switch to the stand-alone call accounting system is 50
feet (15.2 meters). If the distance from the switch and the call accounting system
is more than 50 feet (15.2 meters), or if the switch is an
r
system, see “Switch-to-
Call Accounting Link using DCP Data Modules” on page 46.
Cabling Diagram
Figure 14 shows the connection between the DCE port on a
csi
or
si
system and a
stand-alone call accounting system.
Figure 14. Switch-to-Call Accounting Link (Stand-Alone Call Accounting
System)
DCE (si)
DCE (J2) (csi)
Switch
50 Ft. Maximum
Standalone
Call Accounting
Call
Accounting
Port
Demarcation
Point
M25A or M25B
RS232 Cable
«
eia2gca.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
44Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Test Procedure
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the link
at the demarcation point as shown in Figure 14. The leads marked with an
asterisk are controlled by the switch, and the call accounting system controls the
other leads. Translations for this connection begin on page 205.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
With the mini-tester connected to only the M25 cable from the switch, the mini-
tester should show the following:
With the mini-tester connected to only the interface port on the stand-alone call
accounting system, the mini-tester should show the following:
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
dark
dark
green
green
red
green
dark
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
dark
dark
dark
dark
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
45Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
With the mini-tester connected to the switch and the stand-alone call accounting
system, the mini-tester should show the following (if any of the switch leads are
dark in an end-to-end connection, the processor circuit pack should be replaced):
Another way to test this connection is to connect a dumb terminal to the DCE port
on the switch, make some test calls, and look for call records being displayed on
the terminal.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
green
green
red
green
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
46Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-Call Accounting Link using DCP
Data Modules
This connection is used when the distance between the switch and the call
accounting system is greater than 50 feet (15.2 meters), or when using an
r
system.
Parts List
Co-Resident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting (Homisco)
■One digital communications protocol (DCP) port on the switch; the 8400B
data module uses a TN2214 or TN2224 2-wire digital port, and the 7400A
and 7400B data modules use a TN754C 4-wire digital port
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One D8W modular cord
■One 8400B data module optioned as shown on page 48, a 7400A data
module optioned as shown in Table 4, or a 7400B data module optioned as
shown on page 50
■One DB9-to-DB25 transition cable when using the 8400B data module
■One Equinox P/N:210068 DTE 10/10 adapter (DB25 DTE,
comcode 406983155); see “Appendix B — Connector Pinouts”
■One D6AP modular cord (comcode 102937604).
Xiox or other stand-alone call accounting system
■One digital communications protocol (DCP) port on the switch; the 8400B
data module uses a TN2214 or TN2224 2-wire digital port, and the 7400A
and 7400B data modules use a TN754C 4-wire digital port
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One D8W modular cord
■One 8400B data module optioned as shown on page 48, a 7400A data
module optioned as shown in Table 4 on Page 49, or a 7400B data module
optioned as shown on page 50
■One DB9-to-DB25 transition cable when using the 8400B data module
■One M25A or M25B cable (or equivalent 25-pin straight-through cable);
see “Appendix A — Parts List” on page 242.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
47Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Distance Limits
The distance limit when connecting a data module to a TN2214 or TN2224 with 24
AWG wire is 3500 feet (1067 meters). The distance limit when connecting a data
module to a TN754C is 5000 feet (1524 meters) with 24 AWG wire, and 4000 feet
(1219 meters) with 26 AWG wire.
Cabling Diagram
Figure 15 shows the connection between the switch and the call accounting
system (INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting or stand-alone call accounting) when
using a DCP data module. Use these connections for
r
systems.
Figure 15. Call Accounting Link using DCP Data Modules
Digital
Port
Call
Accounting
Port
Switch
Data
Module
Cross-Connect
Field
D8W
Modular
Cord
103A
Connecting
Block AC Power
M25A or M25B
RS232 Cable
«
MAP
(Intuity Lodging
Call Accounting)
OR
OR
Multi-Port
Serial Card
TTYsaa
Standalone
Call Accounting
D6AP
Modular
Cord
Equinox
P/N:210068
DTE 10/10
Adapter
Xiox Call
Accounting PC
COM1
eia2datamod.cdr
PBX RS232
Cable
PC
Xiox Intelligent
Buffer
M25A or
M25B RS232
Cable
«
Demarcation
Point
Demarcation
Point
50 Ft. Maximum
3500-5000 Ft. Maximum
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
48Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
8400B Options
The options on the 8400B must be set using an ASCII data terminal or a PC using
a terminal emulation package. You must connect the data terminal or PC to the
EIA interface connector on the back of the 8400B. For the switch-to-call
accounting link, a subset of options must be changed. These options are changed
using the AT command set. Use the following steps to set the options on
the 8400B:
1. Set the speed on the data terminal or terminal emulation package to match
the speed of the call accounting system. By doing this, the speed on
the 8400B will autobaud to match the correct speed.
2. From the data terminal or PC, type at . This automatically sets the
speed and parity for the connection. The OK prompt should display.
3. Type the following commands as shown. (The character 0 is the number
zero.) Before you press for each command, make sure that the
command has been entered correctly. The e0 option on the last command
turns off keyboard echo, which means that after you enter this command,
any future keyboard entries will not be displayed, and the OK prompt is not
displayed.
at&f (the OK prompt displays)
ats24=1 (the OK prompt displays)
at&c1&d2&s1s0=1 (the OK prompt displays)
ate0q1&w0&y0&v
The &v portion of the last command displays the current set of options.
Your screen should look something like this:
4. Disconnect the data terminal or PC from the 8400B.
5. Reconnect the unit as shown in Figure 15.
6. Cycle power on the 8400B (disconnect the line cord momentarily).
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 & Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:060
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:70H
S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005 S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0
S00:001 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:70H S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005
S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005
S26:001 S27:40H
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
49Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
If your call accounting system requires a different set of options, consult
the
8400B Plus Data Module User’s Guide
.
7400A Options
The options for the 7400A used for the switch-to-call accounting connection are
given in Table 4. These options must match the call accounting system
communication parameters, which are usually 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
and no parity.
The data module interface board must be positioned at the DCE location, and the
interface option must be set for Answer-Only mode.
Table 4. 7400A Options for Switch-to-Call Accounting Link
Set Interface Set Values
Option Answer-only mode
Set Option Displays Set Values
*Set 300 speed OFF
*Set 1200 speed OFF
*Set 2400 speed OFF
*Set 4800 speed OFF
*Set 9600 speed ON
*Set 19200 speed OFF
Set Answer AUTO
Set Break DISC LONG
Set CI Lead OFF
Set CH Lead OFF
Set CTS Lead NORMAL
Set DCD Lead NORMAL
Set DSR Lead NORMAL
Set DTR Detect 50
Set DTR Lead FOLLOW
Set LL Lead OFF
Set Remote Loop GRANT
Set RI Lead ON
Set RL Lead OFF
Set SIGLS DISC ON
Set TM Lead OFF
* Verify the speed setting with the call accounting vendor.
Enable other speeds as needed.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
50Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
7400B Options
The options on the 7400B must be set using an ASCII data terminal or a PC using
a terminal emulation package. You must connect the data terminal or PC to the
EIA interface connector on the back of the 7400B. For the switch-to-call
accounting link, only a subset of options must be changed. These options are
changed using the AT command set. Use the following steps to set the options on
the 7400B:
1. Set the option dip switches SW1-1 to ON (without phone), SW1-5 to OFF,
and SW1-8 to OFF.
2. Set the speed on the data terminal or terminal emulation package to match
the speed of the call accounting system. By doing this, the speed on
the 7400B will autobaud to match the correct speed.
3. From the data terminal or PC, type at . This automatically sets the
speed and parity for the connection. The OK prompt should display.
4. Type the following commands as shown. (The character 0 is the number
zero.) Before you press for each command, make sure that the
command has been entered correctly. The e0 option on the last command
turns off keyboard echo, which means that after you enter this command,
any future keyboard entries will not be displayed, and the OK prompt is not
displayed.
at&f (the OK prompt displays)
at&c1&d2&s1s0=1 (the OK prompt displays)
ate0q1&w0&y0&v
The &v portion of the last command displays the current set of options.
Your screen should look something like this:
5. Disconnect the data terminal or PC from the 7400B.
6. Reconnect the unit as shown in Figure 15.
If your call accounting system requires a different set of options, consult
the
7400B Data Module User’s Guide
.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:060
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:AAH S16:00H S18:000 S21:00H
S22:76H S23:0BH S25:005 S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X1 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0
S00:001 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:0BH S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:1BH S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
51Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
This connection is used to transmit the call accounting information from the MAP
to the PMS. This call detail information has been reformatted from its format on
the switch for use by the PMS.
NOTE:
This link between the co-resident INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting
package and the PMS is required to transmit call detail records between the
call accounting system and the PMS. This link is separate and distinct from
the INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS link described on page 30.
Parts List
■One Multi-Port Serial card on the MAP (comcode 407009406; J1P260AA1,
List 12)
For this connection, use the second port on the card. This port is not
marked on the card, but is administered in software as port TTYsab.
■One D6AP modular cord (comcode 102937604)
■One Equinox P/N:210068 DTE 10/10 adapter (DB25 DTE,
comcode 406983155); see “Appendix B — Connector Pinouts”
■Gender changers, as needed.
Distance Limits
The distance limit from the MAP to the PMS is 50 feet (15.2 meters).
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
52Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 16 shows the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting connection between the
MAP and a PMS.
Figure 16. INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
MAP
D6AP
Modular
Cord Call
Accounting
Port
Equinox
P/N:210068
DTE:10/10
Adapter
50 Ft. Maximum
PMS
Demarcation
Point
Multi-Port
Serial Card
TTYsab
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
53Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Xiox Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
This connection is used to transmit the call accounting information from the Xiox
call accounting system to the PMS. This call detail information has been
reformatted from its format on the switch for use by the PMS.
Parts List
■One standard null modem serial cable to connect from COM2 on the Xiox
call accounting PC to the call accounting port on the PMS
■Gender changers, as needed.
Distance Limits
The distance limit from the Xiox call accounting PC to the PMS is 50 feet (15.2
meters).
Cabling Diagram
Figure 17 shows the connection between the Xiox call accounting PC and a PMS.
Figure 17. Xiox Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
Call
Accounting
Port
50 Ft. Maximum
PMS
Demarcation
Point
Xiox Call
Accounting PC
COM2 Null Modem Serial
RS232 Cable
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
54Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-PMS Link
This connection is used to transfer the normal hospitality information, such as
names registration, check-in, check-out, and so on, between the switch and the
PMS.
Parts List
■One digital communications protocol (DCP) port on the switch; the 8400B
data module uses a TN2214 or TN2224 2-wire digital port, and the 7400A
and 7400B data modules use a TN754C 4-wire digital port.
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One D8W modular cord
■One 8400B data module optioned as shown on page 56, a 7400A DCP
data module optioned as shown in Table 5 on Page 57, or a 7400B DCP
data module optioned as shown on page 58
■One DB9-to-DB25 transition cable when using the 8400B data module
■One M25A or M25B cable (or equivalent 25-pin straight-through cable);
see “Appendix A — Parts List” on page 242.
Distance Limits
The distance limit when connecting a data module to a TN2214 or TN2224 with 24
AWG wire is 3500 feet (1067 meters). The distance limit when connecting a data
module to a TN754C is 5000 feet (1524 meters) with 24 AWG wire, and 4000 feet
(1219 meters) with 26 AWG wire.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
55Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 18 shows the connection between the switch and the PMS.
Figure 18. PMS Link Using a Data Module
Digital
Port
Switch
Data
Module
Cross-Connect
Field
D8W
Modular
Cord
AC
Power
103A
Connecting
Block
M25A or M25B
RS232 Cable Switch
Port
PMS
Demarcation
Point
«
dcp2gen.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
56Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
8400B Options
The options on the 8400B must be set using an ASCII data terminal or a PC using
a terminal emulation package. You must connect the data terminal or PC to the
EIA interface connector on the back of the 8400B. For the switch-to-PMS link, a
subset of options must be changed. These options are changed using the AT
command set. Use the following steps to set the options on the 8400B:
1. Set the speed on the data terminal or terminal emulation package to match
the speed of the PMS link. By doing this, the speed on the 8400B will
autobaud to match the correct speed.
2. From the data terminal or PC, type at . This automatically sets the
speed and parity for the connection. The OK prompt should display.
3. Type the following commands as shown. (The character 0 is the number
zero.) Before you press for each command, make sure that the
command has been entered correctly. The e0 option on the last command
turns off keyboard echo, which means that after you enter this command,
any future keyboard entries will not be displayed, and the OK prompt is not
displayed.
at&f (the OK prompt displays)
ats24=1 (the OK prompt displays)
at&c1&d2&s1s0=1 (the OK prompt displays)
ate0q1&w0&y0&v
The &v portion of the last command displays the current set of options.
Your screen should look something like this:
4. Disconnect the data terminal or PC from the 8400B.
5. Reconnect the unit as shown in Figure 18.
6. Cycle power on the 8400B (disconnect the line cord momentarily).
If your PMS requires a different set of options, consult the
8400B Plus Data
Module User’s Guide
.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:060
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:70H
S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005 S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0
S00:001 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:70H S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005
S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005
S26:001 S27:40H
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
57Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
7400A Options
The options for the 7400A used for the switch-to-PMS connection are given in
Table 5. These options must match the PMS communication parameters, which
are usually 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
The data module interface board must be positioned at the DCE location, and the
interface option must be set for Answer-Only mode.
Table 5. 7400A Options for Switch-to-PMS Link
Set Interface Set Values
Option Answer-only mode
Set Option Displays Set Values
*Set 300 speed OFF
*Set 1200 speed OFF
*Set 2400 speed OFF
*Set 4800 speed OFF
*Set 9600 speed ON
*Set 19200 speed OFF
Set Answer AUTO
Set Break DISC LONG
Set CI Lead OFF
Set CH Lead OFF
Set CTS Lead NORMAL
Set DCD Lead NORMAL
Set DSR Lead NORMAL
Set DTR Detect 50
Set DTR Lead FOLLOW
Set LL Lead OFF
Set Remote Loop GRANT
Set RI Lead ON
Set RL Lead OFF
Set SIGLS DISC ON
Set TM Lead OFF
* The speed is typically set to 9600 for Transparent mode
and 1200 for Normal mode. Verify the speed setting with the
PMS vendor. Enable other speeds as needed.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
58Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
7400B Options
The options on the 7400B must be set using an ASCII data terminal or a PC using
a terminal emulation package. You must connect the data terminal or PC to the
EIA interface connector on the back of the 7400B. For the switch-to-PMS link,
only a subset of options must be changed. These options are changed using the
AT command set. Use the following steps to set the options on the 7400B:
1. Set the option dip switches SW1-1 to ON (without phone), SW1-5 to OFF,
and SW1-8 to OFF.
2. Set the speed on the data terminal or terminal emulation package to match
the speed of the PMS. By doing this, the speed on the 7400B will autobaud
to match the correct speed.
3. From the data terminal or PC, type at . This automatically sets the
speed and parity for the connection. The OK prompt should display.
4. Type the following commands as shown. (The character 0 is the number
zero.) Before you press for each command, make sure that the
command has been entered correctly. The e0 option on the last command
turns off keyboard echo, which means that after you enter this command,
any future keyboard entries will not be displayed, and the OK prompt is not
displayed.
at&f (the OK prompt displays)
at&c1&d2&s1s0=1 (the OK prompt displays)
ate0q1&w0&y0&v
The &v portion of the last command displays the current set of options.
Your screen should look something like this:
5. Disconnect the data terminal or PC from the 7400B.
6. Reconnect the unit as shown in Figure 18.
If your PMS requires a different set of options, consult the
7400B Data Module
User’s Guide
.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:060
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:AAH S16:00H S18:000 S21:00H
S22:76H S23:0BH S25:005 S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X1 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0
S00:001 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:0BH S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:1BH S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
59Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Test Procedure
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the link
at the data module before you connect to the PMS. The leads marked with an
asterisk are controlled by the switch, and the PMS controls the other leads.
Translations for this connection begin on page 208.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
With the mini-tester connected to only the data module, the mini-tester should
show the following:
NOTE:
The CTS lead shows green when used with an 8400B. RTS will be lit on the
front panel of the 7400A or 7400B.
With the mini-tester connected to only the PMS, the mini-tester should show the
following:
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
dark
dark
red
red
red dark
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
dark
dark
dark
dark
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
60Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
With the mini-tester connected to the data module and the PMS, the link will be
idle, but the mini-tester should show the following (if any of the switch leads are
dark in an end-to-end connection, the processor circuit pack should be replaced):
NOTE:
The CTS lead shows green when used with an 8400B. RTS will be lit on the
front panel of the 7400A or 7400B.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
red
red
red
red
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
61Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Journal/PMS Log or System Printer Connections
These printers are used to run hospitality service reports, to report failed
Automatic Wakeup calls and Do Not Disturb requests, or to run Basic Call
Management System (BCMS) reports.
NOTE:
In most cases, only one printer is provided to perform both the journal/
schedule and PMS log printer functions. The system printer is usually a
separate printer.
Parts List
Each printer connection requires the following parts:
■One digital communications protocol (DCP) port on the switch; the 8400B
data module uses a TN2214 or TN2224 2-wire digital port, and the 7400A
and 7400B data modules use a TN754C 4-wire digital port.
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One D8W modular cord
■One 8400B DCP data module optioned as shown on page 63, one 7400A
DCP data module optioned as shown in Table 6 on Page 64, or one 7400B
DCP data module optioned as shown on page 65
■One DB9-to-DB25 transition cable when using the 8400B data module
■One M25B cable (or equivalent 25-pin straight-through cable); see
“Appendix A — Parts List” on page 242.
■One Okidata Model ML321T printer (or equivalent).
Distance Limits
The distance limit when connecting a data module to a TN2214 or TN2224
with 24 AWG wire is 3500 feet (1067 meters). The distance limit when connecting
a data module to a TN754C is 5000 feet (1524 meters) with 24 AWG wire,
and 4000 feet (1219 meters) with 26 AWG wire.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
62Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 19 shows how to connect a journal/schedule printer, a PMS log printer, or a
system printer to the switch using a data module.
Figure 19. Printer Connections Using a Data Module
Digital
Port
Switch
Data
Module
Cross-Connect
Field
Printer
M25B
RS232
Cable
D8W
Modular
Cord
103A
Connecting
Block
AC
Power
»
«
dcp2prt.cdr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
63Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
8400B Options
The options on the 8400B must be set using an ASCII data terminal or a PC using
a terminal emulation package. You must connect the data terminal or PC to the
EIA interface connector on the back of the 8400B. For the journal/log printers, a
subset of options must be changed. These options are changed using the AT
command set. Use the following steps to set the options on the 8400B:
1. Set the speed on the data terminal or terminal emulation package to match
the speed of the printer. By doing this, the speed on the 8400B will
autobaud to match the correct speed.
2. From the data terminal or PC, type at . This automatically sets the
speed and parity for the connection. The OK prompt should display.
3. Type the following commands as shown. (The character 0 is the number
zero.) Before you press for each command, make sure that the
command has been entered correctly. The e0 option on the last command
turns off keyboard echo, which means that after you enter this command,
any future keyboard entries will not be displayed, and the OK prompt is not
displayed.
at&f (the OK prompt displays)
ats24=1 (the OK prompt displays)
at&c1&d2&s1s0=1 (the OK prompt displays)
ate0q1&w0&y0&v
The &v portion of the last command displays the current set of options.
Your screen should look something like this:
4. Disconnect the data terminal or PC from the 8400B.
5. Reconnect the unit as shown in Figure 19.
6. Cycle power on the 8400B (disconnect the line cord momentarily).
If your printer requires a different set of options, consult the
8400B Plus Data
Module User’s Guide
.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:060
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:70H
S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005 S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0
S00:001 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:70H S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005
S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:1BH S24:01H S25:005
S26:001 S27:40H
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
64Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
7400A Options
The options for the 7400A used for printers are given in Table 6. These options
must match the printer communication parameters, which are usually 9600 bps, 8
data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
The data module interface board must be positioned at the DCE location, and the
interface option must be set for Answer-Only mode.
Table 6. 7400A Options for Printers
Set Interface Set Values
Option Answer-only mode
Set Option Displays Set Values
* Set 300 speed OFF
* Set 1200 speed OFF
* Set 2400 speed OFF
* Set 4800 speed OFF
* Set 9600 speed ON
* Set 19200 speed OFF
Set Answer AUTO
Set Break DISC LONG
Set CI Lead OFF
Set CH Lead OFF
Set CTS Lead NORMAL
Set DCD Lead NORMAL
Set DSR Lead NORMAL
Set DTR Detect 50
Set DTR Lead FOLLOW
Set LL Lead OFF
Set Remote Loop GRANT
Set RI Lead ON
Set RL Lead OFF
Set SIGLS DISC ON
Set TM Lead OFF
* Match the speed based on the printer settings.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
65Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
7400B Options
The options on the 7400B must be set using an ASCII data terminal or a PC using
a terminal emulation package. You must connect the data terminal or PC to the
EIA interface connector on the back of the 7400B. For the journal/log printers,
only a subset of options must be changed. These options are changed using the
AT command set. Use the following steps to set the options on the 7400B:
1. Set the option dip switches SW1-1 to ON (without phone), SW1-5 to OFF,
and SW1-8 to OFF.
2. Set the speed on the data terminal or terminal emulation package to match
the speed of the printer. By doing this, the speed on the 7400B will
autobaud to match the correct speed.
3. From the data terminal or PC, type at . This automatically sets the
speed and parity for the connection. The OK prompt should display.
4. Type the following commands as shown. (The character 0 is the number
zero.) Before you press for each command, make sure that the
command has been entered correctly. The e0 option on the last command
turns off keyboard echo, which means that after you enter this command,
any future keyboard entries will not be displayed, and the OK prompt is not
displayed.
at&f (the OK prompt displays)
at&c1&d2&s1s0=1 (the OK prompt displays)
ate0q1&w0&y0&v
The &v portion of the last command displays the current set of options.
Your screen should look something like this:
5. Disconnect the data terminal or PC from the 7400B.
6. Reconnect the unit as shown in Figure 19.
If your printer requires a different set of options, consult the
7400B Data Module
User’s Guide
.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:060
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:AAH S16:00H S18:000 S21:00H
S22:76H S23:0BH S25:005 S26:001 S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X1 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S1 &X0
S00:001 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:0BH S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
STORED PROFILE 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:1BH S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
66Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Okidata Model ML321T Journal/PMS Log
Printer Options
Using the serial interface card (comcode 406940577), option the printer as follows
for a journal or PMS log printer:
1. Press SHIFT + SEL to enter the Menu Mode.
2. Press Print (Park) to print out the Groups and Items. The first Group/Item to
come up will be Printer Control/Emulation Control.
3. Press SET to option the emulation to ML.
4. Press GROUP (LF) repeatedly until you come to Serial I/F.
5. Press ITEM to advance to the next item in this group (Serial I/F) or SET to
change it.
6. After changing defaults of an item, press ITEM to advance to the next one.
Set the Serial I/F options for the printer as shown in Table 7.
Table 7. Okidata Model ML321T Journal/PMS Log Printer Options
7. After setting the options, press SHIFT + SEL to save the settings.
Item Setting
Parity None
Serial Data 7/8 Bits 8 (if data module)
7 (if DCE port)
Protocol X-ON/X-OFF
Diagnostic Test No
Busy Line DTR
Baud Rate 9600 (match speed of data
module or DCE port)
DSR Signal Invalid
DTR Signal Ready on Power UP
Busy Time 200 ms
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
67Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Okidata Model ML321T System Printer Options
Using the serial interface card (comcode 406940577), option the printer as follows
for a system printer:
1. Press SHIFT + SEL to enter the Menu Mode.
2. Use the GROUP, ITEM, and SET keys to make changes:
■Press GROUP until the group you wish to change appears in the
first column.
■Press ITEM until the item you wish to change appears in the second
column.
■Press SET until the setting you want appears in the third column.
3. Set the options for the printer as shown in Table 8.
Table 8. Okidata Model ML321T System Printer Options
Group Item Setting
Printer Control Emulation Mode ML
Font Print Mode Utility
DRAFT Mode HSD
Pitch 12 CPI
Proportional No
Style Normal
Size Single
Symbol Sets Character Set Standard
Language Set American
Zero Character Slashed
Code Page USA
Clear Feed Line Spacing 8 LPI
Form Tear-Off Off
Skip Over Perforation No
Page Width 13.6”
Page Length 11”
Bottom Feed Line Spacing 6 LPI
Form Tear-Off Off
Skip Over Perforation No
Page Width 13.6”
Page Length 11”
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
68Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
4. After setting the options, press SHIFT + SEL to save the settings.
Top Feed Line Spacing 6 LPI
Bottom Margin Valid
Page Width 13.6”
Page Length 11”
Wait Time 1 sec
Page Length Control by Actual Page Length
Set-Up Graphics Uni-directional
7 or 8 Bits Graphics 7
Receive Buffer Size 16K
Paper Out Override No
Print Registration 0
7 or 8 Bits Data Word 7
Operator Panel Function Full Operation
Reset Inhibit No
Print Suppress Effective Yes
Auto LF Yes
Print DEL Code No
Time Out Print Valid
Auto Select No
Centering Position DEFAULT
CSF Type Wide
Parallel I/F I-Prime Buffer Print
Pin 18 +5v
Serial I/F Parity None
Serial Data 7/8 Bits 8 Bits
Protocol X-ON/X-OFF
Diagnostic Test No
Busy Line DTR
Baud Rate 9600 BPS
DSR Signal Invalid
DTR Signal Ready on Power UP
Busy Time 200 ms
Group Item Setting
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
69Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Test Procedure
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the
connection at the data module. The leads marked with an asterisk are controlled
by the switch, and the printer controls the other leads. Translations for this
connection begin on page 228.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
With the mini-tester connected to only the data module, the mini-tester should
show the following:
NOTE:
RTS will be lit on the front panel of the 7400A or 7400B. The CTS lead
shows green when used with an 8400B.
With the mini-tester connected to only the printer, the mini-tester should show the
following:
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
dark
dark
red
red
red dark
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
dark
red
green
dark
dark
dark green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
70Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
With the mini-tester connected to the data module and the printer, the link is idle
and no software is running, but the mini-tester should show the following:
NOTE:
RTS will be lit on the front panel of the 7400A or 7400B. The CTS lead
shows green when used with an 8400B.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
green
red
red
red
red
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
71Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Printer Connection on the INTUITY
This is an optional printer that the customer may purchase to print INTUITY
Lodging Call Accounting reports.
Parts List
■One Centronics parallel printer cable (customer-provided)
■One parallel printer (customer-provided; the Okidata Model 320 or 184T
are often used).
Cabling Diagram
Figure 20 shows how to connect a printer to the MAP.
Figure 20. Printer Connection on the INTUITY
Parallel
Printer
Port
MAP
Parallel
Printer
Standard
Centronics
Parallel
Cable
»
«
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
72Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Switch-to-INADS Connections
This connection is used for remote maintenance access to the switch from the
Initialization and Administration System (INADS). The connectivity is different for
the CMC switch than for the SCC or MCC switch.
NOTE:
This INADS connection is typically installed only for installations in the
United States. Contact your local support organization to see if INADS is
required in your service area.
Parts List
SCC and MCC
■The AUX connector on the SCC or MCC switch
■One B25A 25-pair cable for cross-connections [connect the central office
(CO) trunk to the last wire pair on this cable]
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One CO trunk for dedicated access.
CMC
■The Modem connector on the switch (this port is found on the Processor
Interface Cable of the CMC hardware labeled as P2)
■One M25A cable (or equivalent 25-pin straight-through cable)
■One U.S. Robotics® Sportster® 33.6K modem
■One RJ11 modular cord
■One 103A connecting block
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One CO trunk for dedicated access.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
73Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 21 shows how the INADS port is connected to an SCC or MCC switch.
Figure 21. INADS Connection for Remote Access to SCC or MCC Switch
Figure 22 shows how the INADS port is connected to a CMC switch.
Figure 22. INADS Connection for Remote Access to CMC Switch
AUX
GuestWorks
Cross-Connect
Field
B25A
25-pair
Cable
CO Trunk
Modem (P2) Modem
GuestWorks
M25A
RS232
Cable RJ11 Modular
Cord
103A Connecting
Block
Cross-Connect
Field
CO Trunk
««
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
74Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
INADS Registration
After connecting the CO trunk for INADS access, call the INADS hotline to register
the switch. For Avaya technicians in the United States, use 1-800-248-1234. For
dealers and distributors in the United States, use 1-877-295-0099. If the
installation is outside of the United States, contact your Center of Excellence
(COE) or your Avaya representative for information about registering the switch.
You will be instructed to give them the dial-up number, the customer identification
number, serial number, and other information. If there is a working fax machine at
the site, request that the INADS group send you a fax that confirms all of the
registration information.
You will also be instructed to add some information to the maintenance-related
system parameters screen. If the customer needs a login assigned, have the
INADS personnel create a customer login ID when they connect to the switch.
For a CMC switch, you must also set up the modem options on Page 3 before a
connection can be made. See Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation, Upgrades
and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets
for more information on modem
setup.
change system-parameters maintenance Page 1 of 4
MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS
Product Identification: 1000000000
First OSS Endpoint: Abbrev Alarm Report: y
Second OSS Endpoint: Abbrev Alarm Report: n
Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers: neither
Cleared Alarm Notification? n Suspension Threshold: 5
Restart Notification? n
Test Remote Access Port? n
CPE Alarm Activation Level: none
Customer Access to INADS Port? n
Repeat Dial Interval (mins): 7
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Start Time: 01 : 00 Stop Time: 06 : 00
Daily Maintenance: daily Save Translation: daily
Command Time-out (hours): 2
Control Channel Interchange: no System Clocks Interchange: no
SPE Interchange: no EXP-LINK Interchange: no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
75Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
MAP Remote Access Connections
The INADS access is required, but the remote administration is optional. See the
INTUITY documentation for more information about this remote access
connection.
NOTE:
If the INTUITY Remote Maintenance Board (RMB) is used, an external
modem is not needed. See the INTUITY documentation for more
information about using the Remote Maintenance Board.
Parts List
■One or two Comsphere® 3820 modems (comcode 107560534) or
locally-provided modems
■One or two straight-through 9-pin to 25-pin transition cables
(comcode 847106945)
■One or two D25F cables (or equivalent straight-through cables)
(comcode 105193668)
■One or two D8W modular cords
■Standard cross-connect hardware
■One or two CO or DID trunks.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
76Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Cabling Diagram
Figure 23 shows how to connect the Paradyne Comsphere 3820 modems to the
MAP for remote access. This diagram also shows how the RMB is connected. If
the RMB is used, the COM2 port cannot be used for any other application.
Figure 23. MAP Remote Access Connections
COM1
COM2
LINE
RMB
MAP
OR
D25F
RS232
Cable
D25F
RS232
Cable
Cross-Connect
Field
103A
Connecting
Blocks
103A
Connecting
Blocks
For
Remote
Admin
(optional)
For
INADS
For
INADS
9-Pin to
25-Pin
Cable
9-Pin to
25-Pin
Cable
D8W
Modular
Cord
D8W
Modular
Cord
D8W
Modular
Cord
Comsphere
3820
DTE
DTE
DIAL
(RJ45)
DIAL
(RJ45)
»
»
»
»
»
»
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
77Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
INADS Alarm Origination Download
You can have the Comsphere 3820 or the RMB automatically configured by doing
an alarm origination download. To start this download, do the following:
1. Use the Customer/Services Administration > Alarm Management
command to display the following screen:
2. Enter the information as shown in the screen, using your actual Product
ID and Alarm Destination phone number (the INADS number).
3. Once the options are correct, press to save the options. Press
to continue.
4. Press to select the Chg Keys function.
5. Press to select the Test Alrm function.
6. Select the Execute Alarm Origination Test menu item.
7. Press y to start the test. The alarm origination download takes 2 to 5
minutes to complete.
8. After the download is complete, select the Review Latest Test Results
menu item. The result message should say Alarm origination test
successful.
For more details on this procedure, see the appropriate MAP installation
document.
+-----------------------------------------------+
+ Alarm Management +
+-----------------------------------------------+
|Product ID 2200000000 |
| |
|Alarm Destination 18005353573 |
| |
|Alarm Origination ACTIVE |
| |
|Alarm Level MAJOR |
| |
|Alarm Suppression INACTIVE |
| |
|Clear Alarm Notification ACTIVE |
+-----------------------------------------------+
F3 Enter
F8
F1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Installing the System
78Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
Translations and Testing
79Connecting the Hospitality Adjuncts
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
The following sections contain translations and testing required to successfully
administer the switch, the INTUITY Lodging Voice Messaging, and the INTUITY
Lodging Call Accounting. Only the most important fields are highlighted with either
required or suggested translations. Unless specified otherwise, the defaults
provided are acceptable.
Most INTUITY Lodging installations will involve the MAP/5P hardware platform. In
some cases, though, customers will have the MAP/40P or MAP/100P. The
screens shown in this section apply for all of these platforms.
NOTE:
The screens shown in this section are examples only. Do not use the
example equipment locations, extension numbers, access codes, and so
on in your system. Use the translations provided by your software specialist
or design specialist.
!CAUTION:
While you are doing these translations on the switch, you should save your
translations regularly using the save translation command. This could save
you time retranslating if you lose power during installation. It takes about 10
minutes to process each translation save.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
80Checklist
Checklist
Table 9 is a high-level checklist of the tasks required to translate a hospitality
solution including the switch and the INTUITY system.
!CAUTION:
Before doing any translations, make sure that the default translation card is
in the system. Unless instructed otherwise, you must always use the default
translation card.
Table 9. Translation Checklist
✔Procedure Begins
on...
Initial options page 12
Miscellaneous translations and testing page 81
Switch-to-INTUITY translations and testing page 157
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS translations and testing page 195
Switch-to-Call Accounting translations and testing page 205
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS translations and
testing page 207
Switch-to-PMS link translations and testing page 208
Journal/PMS Log and System printer translations and test-
ing page 228
Parallel printer translations page 233
Logins, passwords, security, and backups page 233
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
81Miscellaneous Translations
Miscellaneous Translations
Table 10 is a checklist of the miscellaneous translations that must be done before
you administer the links to the adjuncts.
Table 10. Checklist for Miscellaneous Translations
✔Procedure Begins
on...
Time of day and date on the INTUITY system page 82
Special applications on the switch page 83
Dial plan on the switch page 84
Dial plan on the INTUITY system page 85
Feature access codes on the switch page 86
Class of service (COS) on the switch page 89
Class of restriction (COR) on the switch page 91
COS on the INTUITY system page 98
System parameters on the INTUITY system page 99
Fax parameters on the switch and INTUITY system page 101
Abbreviated Dialing Lists on the switch page 103
Listed Directory Numbers on the switch page 104
Attendant console on the switch page 105
Attendant console button layouts on the switch page 106
Attendant Backup on the switch page 110
Office staff telephones on the switch page 113
Backup telephone button layouts on the switch page 116
AUDIX subscribers on the INTUITY system page 120
Guest room telephones on the switch page 121
Analog telephone Caller ID on the switch page 124
Suite telephones on the switch page 126
Guest room mailboxes on the INTUITY system page 132
Recorded Announcements on the switch page 133
Emergency Access to Attendant on the switch page 137
Crisis Alert on the switch page 138
Trunk groups on the switch page 142
DID Numbers on the switch page 143
Automatic Wakeup options on the switch page 148
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
82Miscellaneous Translations
Time of Day and Date (INTUITY)
For R4.4, use the Customer/Services Administration > System Management
> UNIX
®
Management > UNIX Date and Time command to set the time and date
on the INTUITY system. For R5, use the UNIX Management > UNIX Date and
Time command.
The switch time of day and date should already be set. See page 13 for
information about setting the time of day and date on the switch if it is not correct.
It is important that the switch and INTUITY system are set to the same time.
Call Vectoring on the switch page 150
Attendant Vectoring on the switch page 152
Dial by Name on the switch page 153
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer on the switch page 156
Table 10. Checklist for Miscellaneous Translations
✔Procedure Begins
on...
+---------------------------------------------------------+
+ UNIX Date and Time +
+---------------------------------------------------------+
| Date: April 22, 1999 |
| |
| Time: 3:39 |
| |
| AM/PM: PM |
| |
| Timezone: US/Mountain |
| |
| Is Daylight Savings Time used: YES |
+---------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
83Miscellaneous Translations
Dial by Name Special Application (Switch)
Use the display system-parameters special-applications command to verify
that the Dial by Name feature has been enabled. Dial by Name is a feature
available only on GuestWorks and DEFINITY BCS. If the feature has not been
enabled, call the technical support organization (or your COE) and have them dial
in and enable the feature.
display system-parameters special-applications Page 2 of 4
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
(SA7666) - COS Conference Tone Check? n
(SA7880) - ASAI Internally Measured Data? n
(SA7779) - Enhanced DID Routing? n
(SA7777) - Night Service on DID Trunk Groups? n
(SA7778) - Display UUI Information? n
(SA7776) - Display Incoming Digits for ISDN Trunk Groups? n
(SA7852) - # and * in Vector Collect Step? none
(SA7933) - Busy Tone with SAC and No Available Cvg Points? n
(SA7963) - Dial by Name? y
(SA7990) - Service Observe Physical Set? n
(SA7991) - Variable Length Account Code? n
(SA8052) - ISDN Redirecting Number? n
(SA8077) - Russian Power Industry Feature? n
(SA7161) - NORTEL SL1 PRI and DMS Names Display? n
(SA7578) - Integrated Directory Service over DCS? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
84Miscellaneous Translations
Dial Plan (Switch)
Use the change dialplan command to administer the switch dial plan based on
the customer’s requirements. Unless otherwise instructed, set the Local Node
Number to 1. For more information about the Dial Plan feature, see the
DEFINITY ECS Administrator’s Guide
.
NOTE:
The PMS interface supports 3-, 4-, or 5-digit extensions, but be aware that
prefixed extensions do not send the entire number across the interface.
Only the assigned extension number is sent. Therefore, you should not use
prefixed extensions for numbers that are also going to use the Insert/Delete
Digit function (see “Hospitality Parameters” on page 208).
The add second-digit command is used when a first digit is defined as misc in
the Dial Plan. In this example, first digit 7 is used in several ways (70, 72x, 73x,
and 74x are feature access codes, and 71x, 78xx, and 79xx are extensions).
change dialplan Page 1 of 1
DIAL PLAN RECORD
Local Node Number: 1
ETA Node Number:
Uniform Dialing Plan: none ETA Routing Pattern:
FIRST DIGIT TABLE
First Length
Digit - 1 - - 2 - - 3 - - 4 - - 5 - - 6 -
1: extension
2: extension
3: extension
4: extension
5: extension
6: extension
7: misc
8: fac
9: fac
0: attd
*: fac
#: fac
add second-digit 7 Page 1 of 1
SECOND DIGIT TABLE FOR DIGIT 7
SECOND DIGIT TABLE
Digit Identification Number of Digit Identification Number of
Digits Digits
0: fac 2 5: 0
1: extension 3 6: 0
2: fac 3 7: 0
3: fac 3 8: extension 4
4: fac 3 9: extension 4
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
85Miscellaneous Translations
Dial Plan (INTUITY)
Use the AUDIX Administration > change machine command to identify the
range of mailboxes that can be activated by the INTUITY system. This must be
administered to match the switch’s dial plan.
If you change the Extension Length field, you must stop and restart the voice
system. To stop the voice system, use the path Customer/Services
Administration > System Management > System Control > Stop Voice
System. To start the voice system, use the path Customer/Services
Administration > System Management > System Control > Start Voice
System.
change machine Page 1 of 1
MACHINE PROFILE
Machine Name: local Type: local Location: local
Voiced Name? n Extension Length: 4
Voice ID: 0 Default Community: 1
ADDRESS RANGES
Prefix Start Ext. End Ext. Warnings
1: 1000 7999
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
86Miscellaneous Translations
Feature Access Codes (Switch)
The change feature-access-codes command is used to assign the switch
feature access codes. Unless the customer requests a feature, or a feature is
needed for maintenance personnel, do not assign a feature access code for
features not being used. There are no default feature access codes.
change feature-access-codes Page 1 of 5
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Abbreviated Dialing List1 Access Code:
Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access Code:
Abbreviated Dialing List3 Access Code:
Abbreviated Dial - Prgm Group List Access Code:
Announcement Access Code:
Answer Back Access Code:
Auto Alternate Routing (AAR) Access Code:
Auto Route Selection (ARS) - Access Code 1: Access Code 2:
Automatic Callback Activation: Deactivation:
Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA: All: Deactivation:
Call Park Access Code:
Call Pickup Access Code:
CAS Remote Hold/Answer Hold-Unhold Access Code:
CDR Account Code Access Code:
Change COR Access Code:
Change Coverage Access Code:
Data Origination Access Code:
Data Privacy Access Code:
Directed Call Pickup Access Code:
change feature-access-codes Page 2 of 5
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Emergency Access to Attendant Access Code:
Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A All: Deactivation
Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code:
Facility Test Calls Access Code:
Flash Access Code:
Group Control Restrict Activation: Deactivation:
Hunt Group Busy Activation: Deactivation:
ISDN Access Code:
Last Number Dialed Access Code:
Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Lock:
Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Unlock:
Leave Word Calling Send A Message:
Leave Word Calling Cancel A Message:
Malicious Call Trace Activation: Deactivation:
PASTE (Display PBX data on Phone) Access Code:
Personal Station Access (PSA) Associate Code: Dissociate Code:
Per Call CPN Blocking Code Access Code:
Per Call CPN Unblocking Code Access Code:
Print Messages Access Code:
Priority Calling Access Code:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
87Miscellaneous Translations
change feature-access-codes Page 3 of 5
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Program Access Code:
Refresh Terminal Parameters Access Code:
Remote Send All Calls Activation: Deactivation:
Self Station Display Activation:
Send All Calls Activation: Deactivation:
Station Security Code Change Access Code:
Station User Admin of FBI Assign: Remove:
Terminal Dial-Up Test Access Code:
Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code: Separation Code:
Transfer to Voice Mail Access Code:
Trunk Answer Any Station Access Code:
User Control Restrict Activation: Deactivation:
Voice Coverage Message Retrieval Access Code:
Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code:
Whisper Page Activation Access Code:
change feature-access-codes Page 4 of 5
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Automatic Call Distribution Features
After Call Work Access Code:
Assist Access Code:
Auto-In Access Code:
Aux Work Access Code:
Login Access Code:
Logout Access Code:
Manual-in Access Code:
Service Observing Listen Only Access Code:
Service Observing Listen/Talk Access Code:
Remote Logout of Agent Access Code:
Call Vectoring/Prompting Features
Converse Data Return Code:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
88Miscellaneous Translations
change feature-access-codes Page 5 of 5
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Hospitality Features
Automatic Wakeup Call Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Verify Wakeup Announcement Access Code:
Voice Do Not Disturb Access Code:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
89Miscellaneous Translations
Class of Service (Switch)
You must make assignments to the Class of Service (COS) on the switch. A
unique COS must be assigned to each of the following groups of users and
equipment types on the switch:
■Front desk, attendant console, and housekeeping (COS 0)
Telephones and attendant consoles used for check-in/check-out and
Message Waiting Notification must have Console Permissions enabled in
the COS. Designated stations used for housekeeping updates must have
Console Permissions enabled in the COS.
■Guest rooms (COS 1)
Guest rooms where Message Waiting Notification is used to light message
lamps must have Client Room enabled in the COS.
■Office staff (COS 2)
■Guest services (COS 3)
■AUDIX voice ports (4)
■Data modules (COS 15).
!CAUTION:
Do not assign Client Room COS of any of the following:
— Front desk telephones
— Housekeeping telephones
— Office staff telephones
— Guest services telephones
— DID telephone numbers (XDID and XDIDVIP station types).
If any of these are assigned to a Client Room COS, the name field on the
station screen will not be saved in translations.
In addition, do not assign Console Permissions to any Class of Service
except for the attendant consoles, backup telephones, and guest services
telephones.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
90Miscellaneous Translations
Use the change cos command to administer the COS. The following screen
shows an example COS using the COS numbers given in the previous list.
Features assigned with the COS must be approved by the customer.
change cos Page 1 of 1
CLASS OF SERVICE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Auto Callback y n y y nnnnnnnnnnnn
Call Fwd-All Calls y n y y nynnnnnnnnnn
Data Privacy n y n n ynnnnnnnnnny
Priority Calling y n y y nnnnnnnnnnnn
Console Permissions y n y y n n n n n n n n n n n n
Off-hook Alert n y n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
Client Room n y n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y n
Call Forwarding Busy/DA y n y y n n n n n n n n n n n n
Personal Station Access (PSA)nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Extended Forwarding All n n n n nnnnnnnnnnnn
Extended Forwarding B/DA n n n n nnnnnnnnnnnn
Trk-to-Trk Transfer Override n n n n nnnnnnnnnnnn
QSIG Call Offer Originations n n n n nnnnnnnnnnnn
Automatic Exclusion n n n n nnnnnnnnnnnn
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
91Miscellaneous Translations
Class of Restriction (Switch)
You must create several Classes of Restriction (COR) to separate features and
services among the different groups of users and equipment. The COR also
controls calling permissions between CORs. That is, you can restrict one group of
users from calling another group through the COR. The following is a list of these
general COR groups (and the COR number used in the screen examples):
■Guest rooms (COR 1)
■Front desk, attendant console, and housekeeping (COR 2; similar setup as
COR 1)
■Office staff (COR 3; similar setup as COR 1)
■Guest services (room service, kitchen, and so on) (COR 4)
■Trunk groups (COR 20 and COR 21)
■Vectors (COR 30)
■INTUITY AUDIX voice ports and hunt groups (COR 35; similar setup as
COR 30)
■Netcon, processor interface, and data modules (COR 50).
The following screens show typical COR assignments for each of the groupings.
Use the change cor command to administer the CORs. All levels of restriction
must be agreed to by the customer. T
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
92Miscellaneous Translations
This is an example COR for the guest rooms, front desk, housekeeping, and the
office staff.
change cor 1 Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 1
COR Description: GUEST ROOMS
FRL: 7 APLT? y
Can Be Service Observed? n Calling Party Restriction: none
Can Be A Service Observer? n Called Party Restriction: none
Time of Day Chart: 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes? n
Priority Queuing? n Direct Agent Calling? n
Restriction Override: all Facility Access Trunk Test? n
Restricted Call List? n Can Change Coverage? n
Access to MCT? y Fully Restricted Service? n
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Send ANI for MFE? n
MF ANI Prefix: Automatic Charge Display? n
Hear System Music on Hold? y PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup? n
Can Use Directed Call Pickup? n
Group Controlled Restriction: inactive
change cor 1 Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
MF Incoming Call Trace? n
Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n
Block Transfer Display? n
Remote Logout of Agent? n
change cor 1 Page 3 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter "y" to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? y 12? y 24? y 36? y 48? y 60? y 72? y 84? y
1? y 13? y 25? y 37? y 49? y 61? y 73? y 85? y
2? y 14? y 26? y 38? y 50? n 62? y 74? y 86? y
3? y 15? y 27? y 39? y 51? y 63? y 75? y 87? y
4? y 16? y 28? y 40? y 52? y 64? y 76? y 88? y
5? y 17? y 29? y 41? y 53? y 65? y 77? y 89? y
6? y 18? y 30? y 42? y 54? y 66? y 78? y 90? y
7? y 19? y 31? y 43? y 55? y 67? y 79? y 91? y
8? y 20? y 32? y 44? y 56? y 68? y 80? y 92? y
9? y 21? y 33? y 45? y 57? y 69? y 81? y 93? y
10? y 22? y 34? y 46? y 58? y 70? y 82? y 94? y
11? y 23? y 35? y 47? y 59? y 71? y 83? y 95? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
93Miscellaneous Translations
This is an example COR for the guest services.
change cor 4 Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 4
COR Description: GUEST SERVICES
FRL: 3 APLT? y
Can Be Service Observed? n Calling Party Restriction: none
Can Be A Service Observer? n Called Party Restriction: none
Time of Day Chart: 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes? n
Priority Queuing? n Direct Agent Calling? n
Restriction Override: all Facility Access Trunk Test? n
Restricted Call List? n Can Change Coverage? n
Access to MCT? y Fully Restricted Service? n
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Send ANI for MFE? n
MF ANI Prefix: Automatic Charge Display? n
Hear System Music on Hold? y PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup? n
Can Use Directed Call Pickup? n
Group Controlled Restriction: inactive
change cor 1 Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
MF Incoming Call Trace? n
Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n
Block Transfer Display? n
Remote Logout of Agent? n
change cor 4 Page 3 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter "y" to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? y 12? y 24? y 36? y 48? y 60? y 72? y 84? y
1? y 13? y 25? y 37? y 49? y 61? y 73? y 85? y
2? y 14? y 26? y 38? y 50? n 62? y 74? y 86? y
3? y 15? y 27? y 39? y 51? y 63? y 75? y 87? y
4? y 16? y 28? y 40? y 52? y 64? y 76? y 88? y
5? y 17? y 29? y 41? y 53? y 65? y 77? y 89? y
6? y 18? y 30? y 42? y 54? y 66? y 78? y 90? y
7? y 19? y 31? y 43? y 55? y 67? y 79? y 91? y
8? y 20? y 32? y 44? y 56? y 68? y 80? y 92? y
9? y 21? y 33? y 45? y 57? y 69? y 81? y 93? y
10? y 22? y 34? y 46? y 58? y 70? y 82? y 94? y
11? y 23? y 35? y 47? y 59? y 71? y 83? y 95? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
94Miscellaneous Translations
This is an example COR for an outgoing trunk group.
change cor 20 Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 20
COR Description: OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP
FRL: 0 APLT? y
Can Be Service Observed? n Calling Party Restriction: none
Can Be A Service Observer? n Called Party Restriction: none
Time of Day Chart: 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes? n
Priority Queuing? n Direct Agent Calling? n
Restriction Override: all Facility Access Trunk Test? n
Restricted Call List? n Can Change Coverage? n
Access to MCT? y Fully Restricted Service? n
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Send ANI for MFE? n
MF ANI Prefix: Automatic Charge Display? n
Hear System Music on Hold? y PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup? n
Can Use Directed Call Pickup? n
Group Controlled Restriction: inactive
change cor 1 Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
MF Incoming Call Trace? n
Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n
Block Transfer Display? n
Remote Logout of Agent? n
change cor 20 Page 3 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter "y" to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? y 12? y 24? y 36? y 48? y 60? y 72? y 84? y
1? y 13? y 25? y 37? y 49? y 61? y 73? y 85? y
2? y 14? y 26? y 38? y 50? n 62? y 74? y 86? y
3? y 15? y 27? y 39? y 51? y 63? y 75? y 87? y
4? y 16? y 28? y 40? y 52? y 64? y 76? y 88? y
5? y 17? y 29? y 41? y 53? y 65? y 77? y 89? y
6? y 18? y 30? y 42? y 54? y 66? y 78? y 90? y
7? y 19? y 31? y 43? y 55? y 67? y 79? y 91? y
8? y 20? y 32? y 44? y 56? y 68? y 80? y 92? y
9? y 21? y 33? y 45? y 57? y 69? y 81? y 93? y
10? y 22? y 34? y 46? y 58? y 70? y 82? y 94? y
11? y 23? y 35? y 47? y 59? y 71? y 83? y 95? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
95Miscellaneous Translations
This is an example COR for an incoming trunk group.
change cor 21 Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 21
COR Description: INCOMING TRUNK GROUP
FRL: 0 APLT? y
Can Be Service Observed? n Calling Party Restriction: outward
Can Be A Service Observer? n Called Party Restriction: none
Time of Day Chart: 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes? n
Priority Queuing? n Direct Agent Calling? n
Restriction Override: all Facility Access Trunk Test? n
Restricted Call List? n Can Change Coverage? n
Access to MCT? y Fully Restricted Service? n
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Send ANI for MFE? n
MF ANI Prefix: Automatic Charge Display? n
Hear System Music on Hold? y PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup? n
Can Use Directed Call Pickup? n
Group Controlled Restriction: inactive
change cor 1 Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
MF Incoming Call Trace? n
Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n
Block Transfer Display? n
Remote Logout of Agent? n
change cor 21 Page 3 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter "y" to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? y 12? y 24? y 36? y 48? y 60? y 72? y 84? y
1? y 13? y 25? y 37? y 49? y 61? y 73? y 85? y
2? y 14? y 26? y 38? y 50? n 62? y 74? y 86? y
3? y 15? y 27? y 39? y 51? y 63? y 75? y 87? y
4? y 16? y 28? y 40? y 52? y 64? y 76? y 88? y
5? y 17? y 29? y 41? y 53? y 65? y 77? y 89? y
6? y 18? y 30? y 42? y 54? y 66? y 78? y 90? y
7? y 19? y 31? y 43? y 55? y 67? y 79? y 91? y
8? y 20? y 32? y 44? y 56? y 68? y 80? y 92? y
9? y 21? y 33? y 45? y 57? y 69? y 81? y 93? y
10? y 22? y 34? y 46? y 58? y 70? y 82? y 94? y
11? y 23? y 35? y 47? y 59? y 71? y 83? y 95? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
96Miscellaneous Translations
This is an example COR for the Call Vectoring procedures, INTUITY AUDIX voice
ports, and INTUITY AUDIX hunt groups. For the Calling Party
Restriction field, use outward if outcalling and faxes are not being used.
change cor 30 Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 30
COR Description: CALL VECTORING
FRL: 1 APLT? y
Can Be Service Observed? n Calling Party Restriction: none
Can Be A Service Observer? n Called Party Restriction: none
Time of Day Chart: 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes? n
Priority Queuing? n Direct Agent Calling? n
Restriction Override: all Facility Access Trunk Test? n
Restricted Call List? n Can Change Coverage? n
Access to MCT? y Fully Restricted Service? n
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Send ANI for MFE? n
MF ANI Prefix: Automatic Charge Display? n
Hear System Music on Hold? y PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup? n
Can Use Directed Call Pickup? n
Group Controlled Restriction: inactive
change cor 1 Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
MF Incoming Call Trace? n
Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n
Block Transfer Display? n
Remote Logout of Agent? n
change cor 30 Page 3 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter "y" to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? y 12? y 24? y 36? y 48? y 60? y 72? y 84? y
1? y 13? y 25? y 37? y 49? y 61? y 73? y 85? y
2? y 14? y 26? y 38? y 50? n 62? y 74? y 86? y
3? y 15? y 27? y 39? y 51? y 63? y 75? y 87? y
4? y 16? y 28? y 40? y 52? y 64? y 76? y 88? y
5? y 17? y 29? y 41? y 53? y 65? y 77? y 89? y
6? y 18? y 30? y 42? y 54? y 66? y 78? y 90? y
7? y 19? y 31? y 43? y 55? y 67? y 79? y 91? y
8? y 20? n 32? y 44? y 56? y 68? y 80? y 92? y
9? y 21? n 33? y 45? y 57? y 69? y 81? y 93? y
10? y 22? y 34? y 46? y 58? y 70? y 82? y 94? y
11? y 23? y 35? y 47? y 59? y 71? y 83? y 95? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
97Miscellaneous Translations
This is an example COR for the netcon, processor interface link, and data
modules.
change cor 50 Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 50
COR Description: NETCON/PROC LINK/DATA MODULES
FRL: 7 APLT? y
Can Be Service Observed? n Calling Party Restriction: none
Can Be A Service Observer? n Called Party Restriction: none
Time of Day Chart: 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes? n
Priority Queuing? n Direct Agent Calling? n
Restriction Override: all Facility Access Trunk Test? n
Restricted Call List? n Can Change Coverage? n
Access to MCT? y Fully Restricted Service? n
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Send ANI for MFE? n
MF ANI Prefix: Automatic Charge Display? n
Hear System Music on Hold? y PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup? n
Can Use Directed Call Pickup? n
Group Controlled Restriction: inactive
change cor 1 Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
MF Incoming Call Trace? n
Brazil Collect Call Blocking? n
Block Transfer Display? n
Remote Logout of Agent? n
change cor 50 Page 3 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter "y" to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? y 12? y 24? y 36? y 48? y 60? y 72? y 84? y
1? y 13? y 25? y 37? y 49? y 61? y 73? y 85? y
2? y 14? y 26? y 38? y 50? y 62? y 74? y 86? y
3? y 15? y 27? y 39? y 51? y 63? y 75? y 87? y
4? y 16? y 28? y 40? y 52? y 64? y 76? y 88? y
5? y 17? y 29? y 41? y 53? y 65? y 77? y 89? y
6? y 18? y 30? y 42? y 54? y 66? y 78? y 90? y
7? y 19? y 31? y 43? y 55? y 67? y 79? y 91? y
8? y 20? y 32? y 44? y 56? y 68? y 80? y 92? y
9? y 21? y 33? y 45? y 57? y 69? y 81? y 93? y
10? y 22? y 34? y 46? y 58? y 70? y 82? y 94? y
11? y 23? y 35? y 47? y 59? y 71? y 83? y 95? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
98Miscellaneous Translations
Class of Service (INTUITY)
Use the following screens to administer the INTUITY COS for the guest rooms
and the office staff INTUITY AUDIX subscribers. To access the INTUITY COS
screens, use the AUDIX Administration > change cos command. On Page 1,
the Type field must be set to call-answer. See
INTUITY Messaging Solutions
Administration
for more information about the other options on these screens.
If Fax Creation was y on Page 1, change the following on Page 2:
■Voice Mail Message, Maximum Length — Enter 1200.
■Call Answer Message, Maximum Length — Enter 1200.
■Mailbox Size, Maximum — Enter 4800.
change cos 0 Page 1 of 2
CLASS OF SERVICE
Name: class00 COS Number: 0 Modified? y
Addressing Format: extension
Login Announcement Set: System
System Multilingual is ON Call Answer Primary Annc. Set: System
Call Answer Language Choice? n Call Answer Secondary Annc. Set: System
PERMISSIONS
Type: call-answer Announcement Control? y Outcalling? n
Priority Messages? n Broadcast: none IMAPI Access? y
IMAPI Message Transfer? n Fax Creation? n Trusted Server Access? y
change cos 0 Page 2 of 2
CLASS OF SERVICE
INCOMING MAILBOX Order: fifo Category Order: nuo
Retention Times (days), New: 10 Old: 10 Unopened: 10
OUTGOING MAILBOX Order: fifo Category Order: unfda
Retention Times(days),File Cab: 10 Delivered/Nondeliverable: 5
Voice Mail Message (seconds), Maximum Length: 300 Minimum Needed: 32
Call Answer Message (seconds), Maximum Length: 120 Minimum Needed: 8
End of Message Warning Time (seconds):
Maximum Mailing Lists: 25 Total Entries in all Lists: 250
Mailbox Size (seconds), Maximum: 1200 Minimum Guarantee: 0
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
99Miscellaneous Translations
System Parameters (INTUITY)
Use the AUDIX Administration > change system-parameters features
command to assign the INTUITY system parameters. The parameters will vary
according to the customer’s needs. See
INTUITY Messaging Solutions
Administration
for more information about other options on these screens.
change system-parameters features Page 1 of 4
SYSTEM-PARAMETERS FEATURES
LOG-IN PARAMETERS
Login Retries: 3 Consecutive Invalid Attempts: 18
System Guest Password: Minimum Password Length: 6
SUBSCRIBER PASSWORD AGING LIMITS (DAYS)
Password Expiration Interval: 0 (0 for no password aging)
Minimum Age Before Changes: 0
Expiration Warning: 0 (0 for no warning)
INPUT TIME LIMITS (SECONDS)
Normal: 60 Full Mailbox Timeout: 5 Wait (*W): 180
Between Digits at Auto-attendent or Standalone Menu: 3 (3-12)
DISCONNECT OPTIONS
Quick Silence Disconnect? n Silence Limit? 30 (5-30 seconds)
change system-parameters features Page 2 of 4
SYSTEM-PARAMETERS FEATURES
MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETETERS
Broadcast Mailbox Extension:
System Prime Time, Start: 08:00 End: 17:00d Length: 6
Increment(l/s), Rewind: s Advance: s
FEATURE ACTIVATION
Traffic Collection? y
Name Record by Subscriber? y
Multiple Personal Greetings? y
End of Message Warning? y Warning Time (seconds): 15
Priority on Call Answer? n
Call Answer Disable? n
Address Before Record? n
MULTIMEDIA PARAMETERS
Fax Print Destination Prefix:
Text to Speech Conversion: none
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
100Miscellaneous Translations
On Page 3 of the INTUITY system parameters, administer the following:
■Transfer Type — Enter enhanced_cover_0. This will restrict the voice
ports from calling trunk access codes assigned to the trunk groups.
■Transfer Restriction — It is recommended that you enter
subscribers to allow call transfers out of INTUITY AUDIX for calls to office
staff subscribers only, and not calls to guest room telephones. Only
technical support personnel can change this field to digits, and only when
the customer has signed a letter to that effect.
■Covering Extension — Enter the Listed Directory Number extension
used for attendant-seeking calls (See page 104). If the Covering
Extension is not administered, callers that “zero out” from the voice
messaging system will hear “Operator not assigned,” and the caller cannot
receive assistance.
change system-parameters features Page 3 of 4
SYSTEM-PARAMETERS FEATURES
CALL TRANSFER OUT OF AUDIX
Transfer Type: enhanced_cover_0 Transfer Restriction: subscribers
Covering Extension: 2000
ANNOUNCEMENT SETS
System: us-eng Administrative:
RESCHEDULING INCREMENTS FOR UNSUCCESSFUL MESSAGE DELIVERY
Incr 1: 0 days 0 hrs 5 mins Incr 2: 0 days 0 hrs 15 mins
Incr 3: 0 days 0 hrs 30 mins Incr 4: 0 days 1 hrs 0 mins
Incr 5: 0 days 2 hrs 0 mins Incr 6: 0 days 6 hrs 0 mins
Incr 7: 1 days 0 hrs 0 mins Incr 8: 2 days 0 hrs 0 mins
Incr 9: 7 days 0 hrs 0 mins Incr10: 14 days 0 hrs 0 mins
change system-parameters features Page 4 of 4
SYSTEM-PARAMETERS FEATURES
NETWORKING PARAMETETERS
Automatic Deletion of Non-administered Remote Subscribers
Days without Activity: 0 Even If on a Mailing List? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
101Miscellaneous Translations
Fax Parameters (Switch and INTUITY)
Integrating fax machines with the INTUITY system requires special setup on the
switch. Many properties have their fax machines connected to a dedicated central
office (CO) trunk. To integrate the fax machine with the functionality of the
INTUITY fax services, you should do the following to help set up the best solution
possible:
■Connect the dedicated CO fax line to a CO trunk circuit on the switch.
■Translate the CO trunk to have an Incoming Destination of some
previously-unassigned extension. See “Trunk Groups (Switch)” on
page 142 for more information.
■Route calls intended for the CO trunk and the extension to the INTUITY
hunt group. See “Hunt Groups for INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)” on
page 186 for more information.
■On the INTUITY system, the incoming destination extension must be set
up as DNIS service LGfax. See “Services to Phone Number Mapping
(INTUITY)” on page 192 for more information.
■The fax machine must be connected to an analog port on the switch.
■To send a fax from the fax machine, hotel staff and guests must remember
to dial a prefix (typically 9) to gain access to a CO line. All preprogrammed
numbers must be updated with this new dialing plan.
On the INTUITY, the fax machine extension must be administered as the Guest
Services Fax Machine number. If fax messaging is installed on the INTUITY
system, use the following screens to enable fax messaging options. See
INTUITY
Lodging Administration
and
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Administration
for
more information about using the options on these screens.
■Use the Lodging Administration > FAX Add-on Administration > FAX
System Parameters Administration command to administer the fax
system parameters.
+------------------------------------------------------------+
+ FAX System Parameter Administration +
+------------------------------------------------------------+
| Allow delivery of FAX to any number?: Yes |
|Maximum number of digits allowed in the FAX number:15 |
| Naximum number of tries to deliver a FAX:5 |
|Maximum number of channels to use for FAX delivery:2 |
| First retry inverval (min):5 |
| Second retry interval (min):10 |
| Subsequent retries interval (min):30 |
| String of digits to prefix to the FAX number:*99 |
| Use prefix only if entered number is greater than:6 digits|
| Guest services FAX machine:810 |
+------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
102Miscellaneous Translations
■Use the Lodging Administration > FAX Add-on Administration > Guest
FAX Profile Administration command to administer the guest fax profile.
Billing Considerations When Forwarding Faxes
Guests that have faxes in their mailboxes may wish to forward them to an external
destination, often to a location that requires a toll call. In order for the hotel to bill
the guest for the cost of this call, there are some translations you can do on the
switch and the INTUITY system to make this work. This process is not completely
automated, but it could help the hotel recover some call revenue.
1. Administer a feature access code for the CDR Account Code feature (for
example, *49) and a feature access code for the ARS feature (usually 9).
2. Use the change system-parameters cdr command to set the CDR
Account Code Length field to match the number of digits for
extensions in the dial plan. See “CDR Parameters (Switch)” on page 205
for more information.
3. In the FAX System Parameter Administration screen on the INTUITY
system, enter the CDR Account Code feature access code, the letter “e”
(represents the guest room extension number), and the ARS feature
access code in the String of digits to prefix to the FAX
number field.
For this example, you would enter *49e9 in that field.
4. When the guest forwards a fax from his or her mailbox, he or she would
dial the destination telephone number (9 for outside access is not needed).
5. The call generates a call record in which the guest room number appears
in the account code data field of the call record.
6. The customer can now run call accounting reports based on the account
code data field to see if there may be billing required for outgoing faxes. If
the call is a toll call, the guest can be billed for the call.
For assistance in setting this up, contact the technical support center or your
COE. See
INTUITY Lodging Release 4 Administration
or
INTUITY Messaging
Solutions Release 5 Documentation (CD)
for more information about fax
administration.
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Guest FAX Profile Administration +
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
| Extension:733 |
| FAX mailbox for guest ON?:Yes |
| Maximum number of FAX messages:3 |
| Deliver FAX messages to any phone number?:Yes |
|Keep FAX messages active in the mailbox after delivery?:No |
| Extension of the in-room FAX machine:345 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
103Miscellaneous Translations
Abbreviated Dialing Lists (Switch)
For access to a common set of telephone numbers, it is good to set up an
Abbreviated Dialing system list. You can then program several telephones to use
the system list, and if the extensions ever change for those services, you only
have to change the extension in the system list. The following example shows a
five-member system list with entries for the AUDIX extension and the Guest Voice
Mail extension.
You can also set up a group list to use with fixed access buttons on the guest
room telephones. When you want to change the same button for all telephones,
you change the assignment in the group list.
add abbreviated-dialing system Page 1 of 1
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
System List
Size (multiple of 5): 5 Privileged? n
DIAL CODE
01: 699
02: 710
03:
04:
05:
add abbreviated-dialing group 1 Page 1 of 1
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
Group List: 1
Size (multiple of 5): 10 Program Ext: 195 Privileged? n
DIAL CODE
01: 710
02: 195
03: 196
04: 204
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
104Miscellaneous Translations
Listed Directory Numbers (Switch)
Use the change listed-directory-number command to assign Listed Directory
Numbers (LDNs) to the switch. These LDNs are usually the published numbers
for the property and terminate at the attendant console.
change listed-directory-number Page 1 of 2
LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS
Night Destination: 195
Ext Name TN
1: 2000 1
2: 1
3: 1
4: 1
5: 1
6: 1
7: 1
8: 1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
105Miscellaneous Translations
Attendant Console (Switch)
Use the add attendant command to administer an attendant console. For most
installations, there will only be one attendant console.
On Page 1:
■Type — Enter console.
■Extension — Enter a valid extension in the dial plan.
■Console Type — Enter principal.
■Port — Enter the equipment location of the digital port connected to the
console.
■Name — Enter Attendant.
■COR — Use an appropriate COR.
■COS — Use a COS that has Console Permissions.
■Select Buttons — Administer trunk group and hundreds group select
buttons as needed.
See the following sections for assigning feature buttons on Pages 2 and 3.
add attendant 1 Page 1 of 3
ATTENDANT CONSOLE 1
Type: console Name: Attendant
Extension: 3000 Group: 1 Auto Answer: none
Console Type: principal TN: 1 Data Module? n
Port: 01A0301 COR: 2 Disp Client Redir? y
COS: 0 Display Language: english
H.320 Conversion? n
DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes)
Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote
1: 5: 9:
2: 6: 10:
3: 7: 11:
4: 8: 12:
HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: 5: 9: 13: 17:
2: 6: 10: 14: 18:
3: 7: 11: 15: 19:
4: 8: 12: 16: 20:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
106Miscellaneous Translations
Attendant Console Button Layouts (Switch)
The attendant console feature buttons are assigned using the change
attendant 1 command. The recommended button layout differs depending on
whether or not the property has voice messaging, a PMS, or call accounting.
NOTE:
The examples in this section are based on punch-out button labels used
with older consoles that are no longer being sold as new. The button labels
for the newer consoles must be typed or hand-written on the button label
sheets.
For information on installing the attendant console, see the switch installation
documents.
Figure 24 shows the recommended button layout if you have voice messaging.
The shaded buttons are different from the ones suggested in Figure 25. Do not
translate the PMS Alarm or Call Accounting System (CAS) Alarm buttons if there
is no PMS or call accounting system.
Figure 24. Console Buttons with Voice Messaging
Failed
Wakeup
Auto
Wakeup VIP
Wakeup DND
Ext
DID
View
PMS
Alarm
Forced
Release Pos
Busy
CAS
Alarm
Queue
Time
Crisis
Alert
VIP
Retry
Integ
Dirctry Trunk
ID
Check
In Check
Out Occupd
Rooms Maid
Status
Hold
Split Split
Swap
Night
19 24
18
13
12
7
16
VM
Passwd
Voice
Mail
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
107Miscellaneous Translations
Figure 25 shows the recommended button layout if you do not have voice
messaging. The shaded buttons are different from the ones suggested in
Figure 24. Do not translate the PMS Alarm or CAS Alarm buttons if there is no
PMS or call accounting system.
Figure 25. Console Buttons Without Voice Messaging
The buttons shown in Figure 24 and Figure 25 are administered on Page 2 of the
Attendant Console screen using the following button types (button labels shown in
parentheses):
■split (Split; this button assignment cannot be changed)
■split-swap (Split Swap)
■busy-ind or abrv-dial (Voice Mail; with the voice mail extension
programmed)
■busy-ind or abrv-dial (VM Passwd; with the master voice mail password
programmed)
■mwn-act (MW Act; if the system does not have voice mail)
■mwn-deact (MW Deact; if the system does not have voice mail)
■did-view (DID View) (the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers feature
must be enabled; see page 143)
■hold (Hold)
Failed
Wakeup
Auto
Wakeup VIP
Wakeup DND
Ext
DID
View
PMS
Alarm
Forced
Release Pos
Busy
CAS
Alarm
Queue
Time
Crisis
Alert
VIP
Retry
Integ
Dirctry Trunk
ID
Check
In Check
Out Occupd
Rooms Maid
Status
Hold
Split Split
Swap
Night
19 24
18
13
712
6
1
MW
Act MW
Deact
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
108Miscellaneous Translations
■check-in (Check In)
■check-out (Check Out)
■occ-rooms (Occupd Rooms)
■maid-stat (Maid Status)
■directory (Integ Dirctry)
■trk-id (Trunk ID)
■auto-wkup (Auto Wakeup)
■vip-wakeup (VIP Wakeup)
■vip-retry (VIP Retry)
■ext-dn-dst (DND Ext)
■crss-alert (Crisis Alert)
■atd-qtime (Queue Time)
■forced-rel (Forced Release; this button assignment cannot be changed)
■pms-alarm (PMS Alarm)
■cdr1-alrm (CAS Alarm)
■aut-msg-wt (Failed Wakeup; administer the extension where failed
Automatic Wakeup Calls are reported)
■night-serv (Night)
■pos-busy (Pos Busy).
There are other buttons you may want to add to the attendant console. If
preprinted labels are not available for these features, you must create them
on-site. These other buttons include the following:
■abrv-dial (Controlled Restrictions assigned as an Abbreviated Dialing
button). The Abbreviated Dialing button emulates dialing the feature
access code followed by the desired restriction code, such as Outward
Restriction.
For example, if the User Controlled Restriction Activate feature access
code is *27, assign an Abbreviated Dialing button that dials *271. This
automatically dials the feature access code and the code (1) for Outward
Restriction. All the customer has to do now is enter the room number
where the restriction is to be applied. Another button can be assigned for
the deactivate code.
■pr-awu-alm (Automatic Wakeup printer alarm)
■pr-pms-alm (PMS printer alarm)
■pr-sys-alm (System printer alarm)
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
109Miscellaneous Translations
■vip-chkin (VIP Check In) (the Custom Selection of DID Numbers feature
must be enabled; see page 143)
■did-remove (DID Remove) (the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers
feature must be enabled; see page 143).
Figure 26 shows the recommended button layout for the eight display buttons.
These buttons are assigned on Page 3 of the Attendant Console screen.
Figure 26. Console Buttons for Display Features
The display buttons are administered with the following button types (button labels
shown in parentheses):
■normal (Normal Mode)
■inspect (Inspect Mode)
■cov-msg-rt (Cover Msg Rt)
■next (Next)
■delete-msg (Delete)
■call-disp (Call)
■date-time (Date Time)
■timer (Timer).
Normal
Mode Inspect
Mode Delete Timer
Cover
Msg Rt Next Call
18
Date
Time
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
110Miscellaneous Translations
Attendant Backup (Switch)
Use the change console-parameters command to administer the Attendant
Backup parameters. In addition, you must assign a button to the
backup telephones. See page 116 for more information.
On Page 1, administer the following:
■Calls in Queue Warning — This level should be set to 1 if the
customer uses the backup telephones for most call handling. If the
customer uses the attendant console for most call handling, you can set
this level to a higher threshold. The customer may have to experiment with
this setting to find a good working queue level.
■Ext Alert Port (TAAS) — This field must have an analog circuit
equipment location administered even if you do not have external ringing
equipment connected to the circuit. This is required to allow the Attendant
Backup feature to work properly.
■Backup Alerting — Enter y. If Tenant Partitioning is enabled on the
switch, the Backup Alerting option cannot be used.
Queue Calls
change console-parameters Page 1 of 4
CONSOLE PARAMETERS
Attendant Group Name: OPERATOR
COS: 1 COR: 1
Calls in Queue Warning: 1 Attendant Lockout? y
Ext Alert Port (TAAS): 01A1216
CAS: none
Night Service Act. Ext.:
IAS (Branch)? n IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
IAS Att. access Code: Alternate FRL Station:
Backup Alerting? y DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? n
Attendant Vectoring VDN:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
111Miscellaneous Translations
On Page 2, administer the following:
■No Answer Timeout — This controls when ringing at the console will
stop after a call is waiting in queue. When the timeout occurs, the console
stops ringing, but the call can still be answered. A good value to begin with
is 10.
■Alerting — This controls the timeout limit before the console
automatically goes into Night mode and Position Busy when calls are not
answered. This is a good feature to administer in the situation in which the
attendant takes a break or leaves at the end of the day and forgets to put
the console into Night service. For example, if the No Answer Timeout
field is set to 10 seconds, and the Alerting field is set to 10 seconds, the
following occurs: a call rings at the console; after 10 seconds the console
ringing shuts off; the call continues to queue for 10 seconds; then the
console goes into Night mode and Position Busy. The call can now be
answered from a backup telephone.
change console-parameters Page 2 of 4
CONSOLE PARAMETERS
TIMING
Time Reminder on Hold (sec): 30 Return Call Timeout (sec): 30
Time in Queue Warning (sec): 15
INCOMING CALL REMINDERS
No Answer Timeout (sec): 10 Alerting (sec): 10
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: List2: List3: system
SAC Notification? n
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension: 670 Count: 3
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
112Miscellaneous Translations
On Page 3, set the console incoming call queue priority. This defines which types
of calls receive priority over other calls. It is recommended that you set
Emergency Access to the highest priority (1 is the highest priority, to a low of 13).
After that, it is up to the customer to define how calls are prioritized. The following
screen shows the default settings.
On page 4, set the tenant partitions for multiple consoles..
change console-parameters Page 3 of 4
CONSOLE PARAMETERS
QUEUE PRIORITIES
Emergency Access: 1
Assistance Call: 2
CO Call: 2
DID to Attendant: 2
Tie Call: 2
Redirected DID Call: 2
Redirected Call: 2
Return Call: 2
Serial Call: 2
Individual Attendant Access: 2
Interpositional: 2
VIP Wakeup Reminder Call: 2
Miscellaneous Call: 2
Call-Type Ordering Within Priority Levels? n
change console-parameters Page 4 of 4
CONSOLE PARAMETERS
ASSIGNED MEMBERS ( Installed attendant consoles )
Type Grp TN Type Grp TN
1: principal 1 1 9:
2: 10:
3: 11:
4: 12:
5: 13:
6: 14:
7: 15:
8: 16:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
113Miscellaneous Translations
Office Staff, Front Desk, and Guest Services
Telephones (Switch)
You must assign the telephones for the office staff, the front desk, guest room
services, and other telephones located on the property. Use the add station
command to administer these telephones. Depending on the model of the
telephone, the screens show different fields. This example shows the model 6424
used as an attendant backup telephone.
NOTE:
When the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting package is first installed, the
set of extensions and trunks administered on the switch is coordinated with
Homisco. If extensions and trunks are added at a later date, Homisco must
be notified so changes can be added to the call accounting package.
add station 195 Page 1 of 5
STATION
Extension: 195 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: 6424D+ Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: 1 COR: 2
Name: FRONT DESK Coverage Path 2: COS: 0
Hunt-to Station:
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 2 Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Data Module? n Message Lamp Ext: 195
Speakerphone: 2-way Mute Button Enabled? y
Display Language: english Expansion Module? n
add station 195 Page 2 of 5
STATION
FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception: audix Auto Select Any Idle Appearance? n
LWC Activation? n Coverage Msg Retrieval? y
LWC Log External Calls? n Auto Answer: none
CDR Privacy? n Data Restriction? n
Redirect Notification? y Idle Appearance Preference? n
Per Button Ring Control? n
Bridged Call Alerting? n
Active Station Ringing: single Restrict Last Appearance? y
H.320 Conversion? n
Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number?
Audible Message Waiting? n
Display Client Redirection? n
Select Last Used Appearance? n
Coverage After Forwarding? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
114Miscellaneous Translations
add station 195 Page 3 of 5
STATION
SITE DATA
Room: Headset? n
Jack: Speaker? n
Cable: Mounting: d
Floor: Cord Length: 0
Building: Set Color:
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: personal 1 List2: List3: system
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr 5: autodial Number:
2: call-appr 6: autodial Number:
3: call-appr 7: autodial Number:
4: call-appr 8: autodial Number:
add station 195 Page 4 of 5
STATION
FEATURE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
9: atd-qcalls
10: vip-chkin
11: did-remove
12: aut-msg-wt Ext: 699
13: auto-wkup
14: ext-dn-dst
15: check-in
16: check-out
17: did-view
18: mwn-act
19: mwn-deact
20:
21: pms-alarm
22: cdr1-alrm
23: aut-msg-wt Ext: 399
24: autodial Number: *271
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
115Miscellaneous Translations
add station 195 Page 5 of 5
STATION
SOFTKEY BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: directory
2: drop
3: int-aut-an
4: timer
5: priority
6: auto-cback
7: abr-prog
8: abr-spchar Char: ~p
9: lwc-store
10: ringer-off
11: btn-view
12: admin
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
116Miscellaneous Translations
Backup Telephone Button Layouts (Switch)
The telephones used for the Attendant Backup feature should have several of the
same buttons you would assign to the attendant console. These are assigned
using the change station XXXX command, where the XXXX is the extension
number. The following is a list of the recommended feature buttons:
■Attendant Queue Calls (atd-qcalls) (this button is required for the
Attendant Backup feature)
■Attendant Call Pickup (this is an autodial button that is programmed with
the TAAS feature access code; the TAAS code is used to answer the
Attendant Backup calls)
■Attendant time in queue (atd-qtime)
■Do Not Disturb - Extension (ext-dn-dst)
■Automatic Wakeup (auto-wkup)
■aut-msg-wt (administer the extension where failed Automatic Wakeup
Calls are reported)
■Night Service (night-serv) (only one backup telephone can have a Night
Service button)
■Ringer Cutoff (ringer-off)
■Check-In (check-in)
■Check-Out (check-out)
■VIP Check-In (vip-chkin)
■DID View (did-view) (the Automatic or Custom Selection of DID Numbers
features must be enabled; see page 143)
■DID Remove (did-remove) (the Automatic or Custom Selection of DID
Numbers features must be enabled; see page 143)
■Message Waiting Activation (mwn-act; if the system does not have voice
mail)
■Message Waiting Deactivation (mwn-deact; if the system does not have
voice mail)
■Busy Indication for the attendant console extension and any other backup
telephones (busy-ind)
■PMS Alarm (pms-alarm)
■CAS Alarm (cdr1-alarm).
In addition, make sure that the backup telephone’s class of service has console
permissions assigned (change cos).
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
117Miscellaneous Translations
Figure 27, Figure 28, and Figure 29 show a typical setup if you had three
telephones used as backups to the attendant console. The recommended primary
backup telephone is the model 6424. The second and third backup telephones
could be a model 6408. In this example, actual extension numbers are not given.
Extension 1 represents the published front desk telephone number. Extensions 2
and 3 are nonpublished numbers known only to the hotel office staff. In this
example, there are call appearances or bridged appearances of Extension 1 on all
telephones, plus each telephone has at least one other extension that can be
accessed as needed. With this arrangement, it makes it easy for front desk staff to
answer a call at one telephone, put the call on hold, and pick up the call from
another telephone.
When using the 8434 and 8410 telephones, adjust these recommended layouts to
fit the button layouts available with those telephones.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
118Miscellaneous Translations
Figure 27. First Backup Telephone Button Layout (Model 6424)
Extension 1
(bridged app 1)
Extension 1
(bridged app 2)
Extension 2
(call app 3)
Extension 2
(call app 1)
Extension 3
(bridged app 1)
Extension 3
(bridged app 2)
Extension 2
(call app 2)
Auto
Wakeup
Attendant
Call Pickup
Attendant
Queue Calls
Do Not
Disturb
PMS Alarm
CAS Alarm
Failed
Wakeup
1
824
9
Delete
Check-In
Check-Out
DID View
MW Act
MW Deact
Attendant
Busy 6424_buttons.cdr
DID Remove
VIP Check-In
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
119Miscellaneous Translations
Figure 28. Second Backup Telephone Button Layout (Model 6408)
Figure 29. Third Backup Telephone Button Layout (Model 6408)
Extension 1
(call app 1)
Extension 1
(call app 2)
Extension 1
(call app 3)
Extension 2
(bridged app 2)
Extension 2
(bridged app 1)
Auto
Wakeup
1
8
Attendant
Call Pickup
Attendant
Queue Calls
Extension 1
(bridged app 1)
Extension 1
(bridged app 2)
Extension 1
(bridged app 3)
Extension 3
(call app 1)
Extension 3
(call app 2)
Auto
Wakeup
1
8
Attendant
Call Pickup
Attendant
Queue Calls
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
120Miscellaneous Translations
Mailboxes for AUDIX Subscribers (INTUITY)
The following screens show an example of how to administer mailboxes for office
staff subscribers on the INTUITY system. Use the AUDIX Administration > add
subscriber command to access these screens. The default class of service,
class00, is a good option to use. See
INTUITY Messaging Solutions
Administration
for more information about other options on these screens. These
screens are different between INTUITY R4.4 and R5. This example shows
INTUITY R5.
On Page 2:
■Type — Enter call-answer.
■If Fax Creation is y, then change the following fields:
—Voice Mail Message, Maximum Length — Enter 1200.
—Call Answer Message, Maximum Length — Enter 1200.
—Mailbox Size, Maximum — Enter 4800.
add subscriber 150 Page 1 of 2
SUBSCRIBER
Name: Jean Collins Locked? n
Extension: 150 Password:
COS: class00 Miscellaneous 1:
Switch Number: 1 Miscellaneous 2:
Community ID: 1 Miscellaneous 3:
Secondary Ext: Miscellaneous 4:
Account Code: Covering Extension: 161
Broadcast Mailbox? n
Email Address:
add subscriber 150 Page 2 of 2
SUBSCRIBER CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS
Addressing Format: extension Login Announcement Set: System
System Multilingual is ON Call Answer Primary Annc. Set: System
Call Answer Language Choice? n Call Answer Secondary Annc. Set: System
PERMISSIONS
Type: call-answer Announcement Control? y Outcalling? n
Priority Messages? n Broadcast: none IMAPI Access? y
IMAPI Message Transfer? n Fax Creation? n Trusted Server Access? y
INCOMING MAILBOX Order: fifo Category Order: nuo
Retention Times (days), New: 10 Old: 10 Unopened: 10
OUTGOING MAILBOX Order: fifo Category Order: unfda
Retention Times(days), File Cab: 10 Delivered/Nondeliverable: 5
Voice Mail Message (seconds), Maximum Length: 1200 Minimum Needed: 32
Call Answer Message (seconds), Maximum Length: 1200 Minimum Needed: 8
End of Message Warning Time (seconds):
Maximum Mailing Lists: 25 Total Entries in all Lists: 250
Mailbox Size (seconds), Maximum: 4800 Minimum Guarantee: 0
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
121Miscellaneous Translations
Guest Room Telephones (Switch)
Use the add station command to add guest room telephones. Once you have
created one telephone, use the duplicate command to create the rest of the
guest rooms since all rooms usually have the same features, coverage path,
COS, and COR. The Message Waiting Indicator is hardware-dependent
and must match the type of message waiting lamps on the guest telephones. This
can vary from room to room.
NOTE:
There are two features that affect the administration of guest rooms: Caller
ID Telephones and Suite Telephones. See “Administering Analog Caller ID
(Switch)” on page 124 and “Suite Telephones (Switch)” on page 126 for
more information.
add station 107 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 107 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: 2500 Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: 1 COR: 1
Name: Coverage Path 2: COS: 1
Hunt-to Station: Tests? y
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1 Message Waiting Indicator: led
Off Premise Station? n Message Lamp Ext: 107
add station 107 Page 2 of 3
STATION
FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception: audix
LWC Activation? n Coverage Msg Retrieval? n
CDR Privacy? n Auto Answer: none
Redirect Notification? y Data Restriction? y
Per Button Ring Control? n Call Waiting Indication? n
Bridged Call Alerting? n Att. Call Waiting Indication? n
Switchhook Flash? y Distinctive Audible Alerting? n
Ignore Rotary Digits? n Adjunct Supervision? n
H.320 Conversion? n
Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number?
Audible Message Waiting? n
Coverage After Forwarding? s
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
122Miscellaneous Translations
On Page 3:
■Room — Enter the room number. When the hospitality parameter Display
Room Information in Call Display is enabled, this room number and guest
name are displayed. Do not put the word “room” in front of the room
number.
■List1 — You may want to populate an Abbreviated Dialing system list to
be used for one-button access to guest services.
■Line Appearance — Enter call-appr.
After you have administered the guest rooms, you can use the list station
command to verify that all guest rooms have been translated.
add station 107 Page 3 of 3
STATION
SITE DATA
Room: 107 Headset? n
Jack: Speaker? n
Cable: Mounting: d
Floor: Cord Length: 0
Building: Set Color:
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: System 1 List2: List3:
HOT LINE DESTINATION
Abbreviated Dialing List Number (From above 1, 2 or 3):
Dial Code:
Line Appearance: call-appr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
123Miscellaneous Translations
Use the change system-parameters hospitality command to determine
whether guest room information will be shown on digital display telephones
typically used by front desk or office personnel. This may be a security issue for
the customer. Use the Display Room Information in Call Display
field to enable or disable this feature.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Dual Wakeups? y Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? y
VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes: 5
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? y
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report:
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report:
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report:
Announcement Type: mult-integ
Default Announcement Extension: 380
Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement: 30
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: 399
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis: attd
Display Room Information in Call Display? n
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers? y
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers? y
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix? n
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path: 3
Digit to Insert/Delete:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
124Miscellaneous Translations
Administering Analog Caller ID (Switch)
The TN2793B and TN793B analog line circuit packs can be administered to
deliver Incoming Calling Line Identification (ICLID) data to stand-alone analog
Caller ID display units or analog telephones with built-in Caller ID display units.
For this feature to work, the serving central office (CO) must support delivery of
Caller ID information over the trunks that are serving the switch. To administer this
feature, do the following:
■Administer the Caller ID system options.
■Administer stations with Caller ID options.
Administering Caller ID
Use the change system-parameters features command to select the Caller ID
protocol that matches the protocol used by the Caller ID units or telephones, and
to enable display of Caller ID information for room-to-room calls. These options
are set on a system-wide basis. Administer the following options:
■Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals — The available
protocols include:
—Bellcore (default) — US protocol (Bellcore transmission protocol
with 212 modem protocol)
—V23-Bell — Bahrain protocol (Bellcore transmission protocol with
V.23 modem protocol).
■Display Calling Number for Room to Room Caller ID Calls
— Enter y to display both name and number, or n to display name only.
The information displayed on the telephone may be a security issue for the
customer.
change system-parameters features Page 1 of 10
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Self Station Display Enabled? y
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer: none
Automatic Callback - No Answer Timeout Interval (rings): 3
Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes): 10
Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval (seconds): 20
AAR/ARS Dial Tone Required? y
Music/Tone on Hold: music Port: 01B1101
Music (or Silence) on Transferred Trunk Calls? no
DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment: attd
Messaging Service Adjunct (MSA) Connected? n
Internal Automatic Answer for Attendant Extended Calls? n
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled? y
ACA Referral Calls: local
ACA Referral Destination: attd
ACA Short Holding Time Originating Extension: 3070
ACA Long Holding Time Originating Extension: 3070
Abbreviated Dial Programming by Assigned Lists? n
Auto Abbreviated/Delayed Transition Interval (rings): 2
Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals: Bellcore
Display Calling Number for Room to Room Caller ID Calls? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
125Miscellaneous Translations
Administering Caller ID Station Options
Use the add station or change station commands to administer the Caller ID
options for each Caller ID telephone. Administer the following options:
■Type — Enter CallrID.
■Display Caller ID — Enter y to enable Caller ID for this telephone.
■Caller ID Message Waiting Indication — Enter y to enable
Bellcore-defined FSK message waiting indication for this telephone. When
this option is enabled, the circuit pack will refresh the Message Waiting
Indication status for this telephone on a regular basis.
This administration is independent of the Message Waiting
Indicator field.
add station 107 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 107 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: CallrID Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: 1 COR: 1
Name: Coverage Path 2: COS: 1
Hunt-to Station: Tests? y
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1 Message Waiting Indicator: led
Off Premise Station? n Message Lamp Ext: 107
Display Caller ID: y
Caller ID Message Waiting Indication? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
126Miscellaneous Translations
Suite Telephones (Switch)
There are two features that better enable the setup of suite telephones: Suite
Check-In and Station Hunt Before Coverage.
Suite Check-In allows the switch to check-in more than one telephone with one
check-in command, whether the command is done from the switch or from the
PMS. This is done by setting up a “hunt-to chain” between a primary telephone
and up to 29 secondary telephones that are installed at different locations of a
suite, or between telephones in separate rooms that have been linked as a suite
of rooms. This feature does not apply to telephones that have bridged extensions
of the primary extension; the secondary phones must have their own extension
numbers.
For example, room 207 has three telephones, each with different extensions:
7207 (the primary extension), 7887, and 7897 (secondary extensions). You would
administer station hunting from 7207 to 7887, and from 7887 to 7897. When you
check in room 207 (extension 7207), the check-in process looks at the Hunt-To
Station field, and if there is an extension in that field (in this case, 7887), that
extension is also checked in. The system then checks the second extension’s
Hunt-To Station field, and if there is an extension in that field (in this
case, 7897), that extension is also checked in. You can link up to 30 stations as
one suite of telephones. There is no limit to the number of suites you can create.
When two or more telephones are administered in this suite arrangement, you
must also administer how incoming calls will be handled. There is a coverage
option called Station Hunt Before Coverage. If Station Hunt Before Coverage is
not enabled, calls to the primary extension (in this example, 7207) will go to
coverage as specified in the coverage path criteria. If Station Hunt Before
Coverage is enabled and there is a call to room 207 (extension 7207), if
extension 7207 is busy, the call hunts to 7887. If extension 7887 is busy, the call
hunts to extension 7897. If extension 7897 is busy, the call goes to coverage for
extension 7207 (usually voice mail or the front desk). If any of the telephones in
the station hunting group are idle, the call rings at that telephone and, when not
answered, goes to coverage for extension 7207 (the primary extension). It is
important to remember that hunting occurs only when an extension is busy, not
when a call goes unanswered.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
127Miscellaneous Translations
Enabling Suite Check-In
Use the change system-parameters hospitality command, Page 3, to enable
the Suite Check-In feature.
Administering Station Hunting
Use the add station XXXX or change station XXXX command to administer
Hunt-To Stations. Based on the previous suite example, the following screen
shows how you would administer station hunting from primary extension 7207 to
secondary extension 7887.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 3 of 3
ROOM STATES HOSPITALITY
Definition for Rooms in State 1: OCCUPIED/DIRTY
Definition for Rooms in State 2: OCCUPIED/MAID IN ROOM
Definition for Rooms in State 3: OCCUPIED/CLEAN
Definition for Rooms in State 4: VACANT/CLEAN
Definition for Rooms in State 5:
Definition for Rooms in State 6:
HOSPITALITY FEATURES
Suite Check-in? y
change station 7207 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 7207 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: CallrID Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: 1 COR: 1
Name: Coverage Path 2: COS: 1
Hunt-to Station: 7887 Tests? y
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1 Message Waiting Indicator: led
Off Premise Station? n Message Lamp Ext: 7207
Display Caller ID: y
Caller ID Message Waiting Indication? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
128Miscellaneous Translations
The following screen shows how you would then administer station hunting from
secondary extension 7887 to secondary extension 7897.
You would repeat this administration for each telephone in the hunting group.
Administering Station Hunt Before Coverage
Use the change system-parameters coverage-forwarding command, Page 1,
to enable or disable Station Hunt Before Coverage.
change station 7887 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 7887 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: CallrID Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: 1 COR: 1
Name: Coverage Path 2: COS: 1
Hunt-to Station: 7897 Tests? y
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1 Message Waiting Indicator: led
Off Premise Station? n Message Lamp Ext: 7887
Display Caller ID: y
Caller ID Message Waiting Indication? n
change system-parameters coverage-forwarding Page 1 of 2
SYSTEM PARAMETERS - CALL COVERAGE/CALL FORWARDING
CALL COVERAGE/FORWARDING PARAMETERS
Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings): 2
Off-Net Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings): 2
Coverage - Caller Response Interval (seconds): 4
Threshold For Blocking Off-Net Redirection of Incoming Trunk Calls: 1
COVERAGE
Keep Held SBA At Coverage Point? y
External Cvg Treatment For G3 Transferred Calls to G2 Supporting AUDIX? n
Immediate Redirection on Receipt of PROGRESS Inband Information? n
Maintain SBA At Principal? y
Station Hunt Before Coverage? y
FORWARDING
Call Forward Override? n
Coverage after Forwarding? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
129Miscellaneous Translations
Considerations
There are some considerations when setting up suite telephones.
■Automatic Selection of DID Numbers and Custom Selection of VIP DID
Numbers for Guest Rooms
If Automatic Selection of DID Numbers or Custom Selection of VIP DID
Numbers is active, a DID number is assigned only to the primary extension
(the one that appears in the check-in message), not to all of the secondary
hunt-to extensions.
■Automatic Wakeup
An Automatic Wakeup will be set and delivered only for the extension
dialed, not the hunt-to extensions. If the wakeup call is placed and the
telephone is busy, the wakeup call is retried two more times at 5-minute
intervals.
■Call Coverage
If Station Hunt Before Coverage is active, a call to a busy telephone tries to
terminate to the hunt-to telephone before going to coverage. If the call
goes to coverage, it goes to the coverage of the originally-dialed number.
This is true unless the dialed number is an XDID number, and then the call
goes to the coverage of the non-XDID telephone found in the XDID’s hunt-
to field.
■Call Detail Recording
Calls made from any of the secondary suite telephones will record the
extension that placed the call, not the primary suite extension. Billing for
calls from secondary extensions must be coordinated with the call
accounting system vendor.
■Check-In
If the primary extension or any of the secondary extensions are already in
the checked-in state, the room will not be checked in, and the message
“Room Already Occupied” will display.
■Check-Out
If the primary extension is not in the occupied state, the message “Room
Already Vacant” is displayed, and no rooms are checked out. If any
secondary extensions are in the vacant state, all extensions will be
checked out, and “Check Out Complete” is displayed.
■Controlled Restrictions
When a controlled restriction is applied to the primary extension, the
restriction is applied to all secondary extensions. This applies to restrictions
done from the PMS, the attendant console, or from an authorized
telephone.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
130Miscellaneous Translations
■Dial by Name
Secondary extensions that are checked in as part of a suite have an
asterisk (*) inserted before the name that is stored in the names database.
This prevents someone from using Dial by Name to access a secondary
extension; only the primary extension can be accessed. However, when a
guest calls the attendant or a display telephone from one of the secondary
extensions, the guest name (with the asterisk in front of it) displays.
■Do Not Disturb
When one of the telephones in a suite of telephones has Do Not Disturb
activated, calls to that telephone go to intercept treatment, not to the next
hunt-to telephone in the suite.
■Housekeeping Status Updates
When room status is updated by housekeeping, it should be done from the
primary extension for that room in order to be properly recorded. If
housekeeping updates the status from the secondary extensions in the
suite, the status for the suite (the primary extension) will not be updated.
■Mailboxes
Mailboxes on the INTUITY system must be created manually for suites of
rooms.
■Message Waiting Lamps
Messages left for the primary extension do not light the message waiting
lamps of the secondary extensions unless the Message Lamp Ext field
for the secondary extensions contains the primary extension. In some
cases, the customer will want each telephone to have its own message
waiting lamp. In other cases, the customer will want a single message
waiting lamp for all telephones in a suite.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
131Miscellaneous Translations
■PMS Synchronization
In some cases, the PMS database and the switch database may get
out-of-sync, and the telephones in a suite may not have the same status. If
this happens, front desk personnel may have to check out the room (saving
any messages for that room) and then retry the check-in.
During a database swap, if the PMS sends an extension that should be
checked in but that is not currently checked in, all extensions in the hunt-to
chain are updated along with the primary extension, regardless of their
current state.
During a Room Change, the information for the old primary extension and
secondary hunt-to extensions is cleared. All of the old information is
inserted for the new room number.
During a Room Swap, the system will change the guest name and
coverage path between the two rooms for the primary extension and the
secondary extensions.
■Send All Calls
When a telephone has Send All Calls active, and the telephone is called,
the call goes directly to coverage, and no station hunting is done. If a
hunt-to telephone has Send All Calls active, it is skipped in the hunt-to
chain.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
132Miscellaneous Translations
Mailboxes for Guest Rooms (INTUITY)
Guest room mailboxes are handled differently depending on which type of
messaging link is used between the switch and the INTUITY.
When using TCP/IP or X.25 signaling, messages are sent between the PMS and
the INTUITY system to automatically create guest room mailboxes when the PMS
checks in a guest. No manual intervention is required.
When using Mode Code, you must manually create a mailbox for each guest
room and leave the mailbox open at all times. This procedure is described in the
INTUITY Lodging Release 4 Administration
document or on the
INTUITY
Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation (CD)
. You must also use the
Lodging Administration > System Parameter Administration command and
set the Lamps ON For New Messages Only field to No. This means that the
customer must clear messages manually every time a guest checks out.
Instructions for this are also found in these documents.
When mailboxes are created, an * (asterisk) or 0 (zero) in the Guest Password
field allows access to anyone checking that mailbox for messages. The system
will not prompt the user for a password. If a # (pound or hash) is in the Guest
Password field, guests can access their voice mailboxes only from their rooms
until the guest assigns a valid password to the account. After assigning a
password, guests can then get their messages from any location.
NOTE:
The asterisk is the default password for a PMS-initiated check-in when the
PMS does not send a password to the switch in stand-alone mode. The
pound (or hash) symbol is the default password for a PMS-initiated check-in
when the PMS does not send a password to the switch in the integrated
switch link mode. See “INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations” on
page 195 for more information.
If the guest mailbox has the Allow Personal Greeting field enabled, a
guest can create a personal greeting, and also change his or her password when
accessing his or her mailbox. A password must be four digits, non-sequential,
non-repetitive, and not the same number as the room number.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
133Miscellaneous Translations
Recorded Announcements (Switch)
Use the change announcements command to assign extension numbers to be
used for recorded announcements. You can have up to 16 different recordings per
Integrated Announcements circuit pack. The maximum recording time per circuit
pack is 256 seconds (TN750) or 512 seconds (TN750B or TN750C). The
extensions used for recorded announcements must already be administered in
the dialing plan but cannot be used for any other purpose (such as stations or
directory numbers).
Once you have designated which extensions will be used for recorded
announcements, use the following procedures to record and test the
announcements. You must record the announcements from the attendant console
or from a station that has console permissions. It is recommended that you have a
hotel employee record the announcements so the same person can be used for
later changes or additions.
To record each of the announcements, do the following:
1. Go off-hook, and dial the Announcement FAC _____.
2. Dial the extension number of the announcement you want to record.
If an announcement session is already in progress, or if announcements
are being saved or restored, you will hear reorder tone. Try again later.
3. Press , and record after the tone.
If the announcement already exists and is marked “protected” in the
announcements screen, you will hear intercept tone.
change announcements Page 1 of 8
ANNOUNCEMENTS/AUDIO SOURCES
Ann.
No. Ext. Type COR TN Name Q QLen Pro Rate Port
1: 380 integrated 1 1 Wakeup n N/A n 32 01A14
2: 381 integrated 1 1 1st Auto Atnd n N/A n 32 01A14
3: 382 integrated 1 1 Dial Extension n N/A n 32 01A14
4: 383 integrated 1 1 Directory n N/A n 32 01A14
5: 1 1 n
6: 1 1 n
7: 1 1 n
8: 1 1 n
9: 1 1 n
10: 1 1 n
11: 1 1 n
12: 1 1 n
13: 1 1 n
14: 1 1 n
15: 1 1 n
16: 1 1 n
1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
134Miscellaneous Translations
4. Hang up when finished recording the message.
NOTE:
The system records the sound of the receiver returning to the
station. Press the switchhook with your finger, press , or
hang up gently.
5. After waiting 15 seconds, dial the extension number of the announcement
you just recorded.
6. Listen to the recording. If you need to record the message again, repeat
this procedure. If the message is satisfactory, hang up, and repeat this
procedure to record the other announcements.
To delete a recorded announcement, do the following:
1. Go off-hook at a station, and dial the Announcement FAC _____.
2. Dial the extension number of the announcement you want to delete.
3. Press .
Confirmation tone is heard, and the announcement is deleted.
4. Hang up.
5. Use the change announcements command to delete the announcement
extension.
If your system uses the TN750 or TN750B circuit packs, you must manually save
the announcements recorded on those circuit packs. Use the save
announcements command. If you do not save the announcements, all
announcements recorded since the last save will be lost if the system loses
power, or if the TN750 or TN750B circuit packs are removed from the system.
If your system uses only the TN750C circuit pack, saving the announcements is
not required. The TN750C has on-board memory for all announcements.
Drop
3
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
135Miscellaneous Translations
Use the change system-parameters hospitality command to administer options
associated with recorded announcements. On Page 2, administer the following:
■Use the Announcement Type field to indicate the type of automatic
wakeup announcement the hotel guest will receive. Allowable entries are
as follows:
NOTE:
One of the following four fields appears depending on what data
is entered in the Announcement Type field.
—The Auxiliary Board for Announcement field appears only
when the external announcement type is used. This indicates the
equipment location of an auxiliary trunk circuit that connects to the
external announcement equipment.
—The Integrated Announcement Extension field appears
only when the integrated announcement type is used. This indi-
cates the wakeup announcement extension when using the inte-
grated announcement circuit pack.
Valid entries Usage
external Applicable when using an announcement adjunct.
If external is used, complete the Auxiliary Board for
Announcement field.
integrated Applicable when using the TN750B or TN750C
announcement circuit packs.
If integrated is used, complete the Integrated
Announcement Extension field. The extension you
enter must be a valid integrated announcement exten-
sion (administered on the Recorded Announcements
screen) or a VDN. If you enter an invalid extension, the
switch displays an error message.
mult-integ Applicable when using the TN750B or TN750C
announcement circuit packs.
If mult-integ is used, complete the Default
Announcement Extension field. The extension you
enter must be a valid integrated announcement exten-
sion (administered on the Recorded Announcements
screen) or a VDN. If you enter an invalid extension, the
switch displays an error message.
voice- synthesis If voice-synthesis is used, complete the Announce-
ment Ports field.
music-on-hold If music-on-hold is used, no other field appears.
silence If silence is used, no other field appears.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
136Miscellaneous Translations
—The Default Announcement Extension field appears only
when the mult-integ announcement type is used. This indicates the
default wakeup announcement extension when using the integrated
announcement circuit pack.
—The Announcement Ports field appears only when the voice-
synthesis announcement type is used. For the voice-synthesis
announcement type, this indicates the equipment location of two
ports on a voice synthesizer circuit pack.
■The Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement
field indicates the length of time, in seconds, that a hotel guest will be
connected to an announcement. This applies only after the guest has
heard the announcement completely one time, and then continues to listen.
For more information about recorded announcements, see Managing
Announcements in the
DEFINITY ECS Administrator’s Guide
. For information
about multiple music-on-hold sources, see the Tenant Partitioning section of the
DEFINITY ECS Administrator’s Guide
.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Dual Wakeups? y Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? y
VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes: 5
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? y
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report:
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report:
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report:
Announcement Type: mult-integ
Default Announcement Extension: 380
Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement: 30
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: 399
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis:
Display Room Information in Call Display? n
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers? y
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers? y
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix? n
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path: 3
Digit to Insert/Delete:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
137Miscellaneous Translations
Emergency Access to Attendant (Switch)
Use the display system-parameters customer-options command, Page 3, to
verify that the Emergency Access to Attendant feature is enabled. This feature
can only be enabled with the
init
login ID. Contact technical support or your COE if
you do not have permission to make this change.
Use the change system-parameters features command to administer
parameters for the Emergency Access to Attendant feature.
■Time before Off-hook Alert — This is the system delay after a user
goes off-hook before the attendant is notified of the condition.
■Emergency Access Redirection Extension — Enter a backup
extension that can receive off-hook alert calls.
■Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue —
Enter the number of off-hook alert calls that you wish to allow at any one
time in the attendant queue.
■You must also administer the feature access code (see page 86) and the
Off-Hook Alert option for the appropriate COS (see page 89).
change system-parameters features Page 3 of 10
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue: 5
Time before Off-hook Alert: 10
Emergency Access Redirection Extension: 195
Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue: 5
Call Pickup Alerting? n
Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup? y
Call Pickup on Intercom Calls? y
Directed Call Pickup? n
Extended Group Call Pickup: none
Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to Originator? y
Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment: attendant
Controlled Termination Restriction (Do Not Disturb): attendant
Controlled Station to Station Restriction: attendant
AUTHORIZATION CODE PARAMETERS Authorization Codes Enabled? y
Authorization Code Length: 7
Authorization Code Cancellation Symbol: #
Attendant Time Out Flag? n
Display Authorization Code? y
Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces: none
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
138Miscellaneous Translations
Crisis Alert (Switch)
Crisis Alert is a feature that sends a message to one or more attendant consoles,
one or more digital display telephones, and to as many as three digital, numeric
pagers when a guest or employee places a call to an emergency service agency
(for example, 911). The message will help personnel identify where the
emergency has occurred at the property.
To ensure that the Crisis Alert feature operates properly, you must administer ARS
patterns to accept any combination of digits that guests could possibly dial while
trying to dial the emergency service agency, and route the call to the correct
location. For example, some guests might dial 9 (for an outside line) and then 911.
Other guests may only dial 911. Without the correct routing patterns, the call will
not go through. These screens show two examples of how this routing can be
administered.
Assign a routing pattern and the alrt Call Type to the desired emergency service
access code. For example, if your emergency service access code is 911, assign
the 911 digit string to a routing pattern, and assign it the alrt Call Type. This takes
care of the condition when the guest dials 9 (for local access) and then 911. If a
guest only dials 911, you also want the call to route to the emergency service
agency. You must assign a dialed string of 11 with a different routing pattern that
removes the dialed digits 11 and inserts the dialed digit string 911. The following
screens show these two examples administered as part of the ARS Digit Analysis
Table.
change ars analysis 9 Page 1 of 2
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all Percent Full: 6
Dialed Total Route Call Node ANI
String Min Max Pattern Type Num Reqd
911 3 3 5 alrt n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
139Miscellaneous Translations
Use the change route-pattern command to assign a routing pattern for the
emergency service access code. In this first example, Preference 1 of Pattern 5 is
used when guests dial 9911 (9 for the ARS access code, and 911 for the
emergency service agency).
change ars analysis 1 Page 1 of 1
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all Percent Full: 6
Dialed Total Route Call Node ANI
String Min Max Pattern Type Num Reqd
11 2 2 6 alrt n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
change route-pattern 5 Page 1 of 1
Pattern Number: 5
Grp. FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No. Del Inserted IXC
No. Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits
1: 5 0 user
2: user
3: user
4: user
5: user
6: user
BCC VALUE TSC CA-TSC ITC BCIE Service/Feature No Numbering LAR
0 1 2 3 4 W Request Dgts Format
Subaddress
1: y y y y y n n rest none
2: y y y y y n n rest none
3: y y y y y n n rest none
4: y y y y y n n rest none
5: y y y y y n n rest none
6: y y y y y n n rest none
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
140Miscellaneous Translations
In this second example, Preference 1 of Pattern 6 is used when guests dial 911.
Pattern 6 deletes the two digits dialed (11) after the ARS access code (9) and
inserts the caller’s intended digit string (911).
Crisis Alert can notify attendant consoles, digital display telephones, and digital,
numeric pagers. If you are setting up Crisis Alert to notify one or more display
telephones, use the change system-parameters crisis-alert command to
indicate whether every designated display telephone user must respond to the
crisis notification, or whether only one user must respond.
Use this same command to administer the Crisis Alert to Pager options.
NOTE:
You should never set up Crisis Alert to Pager as your only option. When
using the Crisis Alert to Pager option, always set up at least one attendant
console or telephone to receive the same crisis alert messages.
The options for Crisis Alert to Pager include the following:
■Alert Pager — Enter y to enable Crisis Alert to Pager. When this field is
enabled, the other fields display. If you want to temporarily disable this
feature, enter n. This will cause the fields to disappear, but any data in the
fields will be displayed the next time you enable the feature.
■Originating Extension — Enter a valid extension from the dial plan.
■Crisis Alert Code — Enter a distinctive code that identifies this page as an
emergency call from the property. For example, you might use 911 in the
United States.
change route-pattern 6 Page 1 of 1
Pattern Number: 6
Grp. FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No. Del Inserted IXC
No. Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits
1:50 2911 user
2: user
3: user
4: user
5: user
6: user
BCC VALUE TSC CA-TSC ITC BCIE Service/Feature No Numbering LAR
0 1 2 3 4 W Request Dgts Format
Subaddress
1: y y y y y n n rest none
2: y y y y y n n rest none
3: y y y y y n n rest none
4: y y y y y n n rest none
5: y y y y y n n rest none
6: y y y y y n n rest none
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
141Miscellaneous Translations
■Retries — Enter the number of times (0 to 10) the system will attempt to
send the alert message if the call was unsuccessful.
■Retry Interval — Enter the amount of time between retries. You may enter a
value from 30 to 60 seconds.
■Main Number — Enter the LDN for the property, or a number that the user
would call to respond to the crisis alert page. This is an optional field, and
can be up to 15 digits, including one or more # digits at the end of the
number.
■Pager Numbers and PIN — Enter at least one, and up to three different
pager numbers. Each pager number can be up to 15 digits long. If needed,
enter personal ID numbers (PIN) for each pager number. PINs can also be
up to 15 characters long. For the PIN, the letter p adds a pause interval
before sending the PIN. The characters * and # may also be part of the
PIN.
■DTMF Duration — Enter a value (from 20 to 2550 msec) for the duration of
the DTMF tones, and the amount of pause between the tones. The default
for each is 100 msec. This value may need to be adjusted depending on
trunking requirements.
Based on the above example, the person with pager number 623-577-1353 will
receive crisis alerts that will display “999 3000 555-3000.”
change system-parameters crisis-alert Page 1 of 1
CRISIS ALERT SYSTEM PARAMETERS
ALERT STATION
Every User Responds? y
ALERT PAGER
Alert Pager? y
Originating Extension: 3000
Crisis Alert Code: 999
Retries: 3
Retry Interval: 60
Main Number: 555-3000
Pager Number Pin Number
1: 623-577-1353 1:
2: 2:
3: 3:
DTMF Duration - Tone (msec): 100 Pause (msec): 100
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
142Miscellaneous Translations
Trunk Groups (Switch)
Use the add trunk-group command to assign each trunk group. For more
information on administering trunk groups, including CAMA 911 emergency
trunks, see the
DEFINITY ECS Administrator’s Guide
.
■COR — Each trunk group must have a COR.
■CDR Reports — Enter y for every trunk group that the customer wishes to
record. Usually, only outgoing trunk groups are recorded.
■Dial Access — Enter n.
NOTE:
When a call accounting package is first installed, the set of extensions and
trunks administered on the switch is coordinated with the call accounting
vendor. If extensions and trunks are added at a later date, the call
accounting vendor must be notified so changes can be added to the call
accounting package.
add trunk-group 1 Page 1 of 11
TRUNK GROUP
Group Number: 1 Group Type: co CDR Reports: y
Group Name: Outside Call COR: 20 TN: 1 TAC: 710
Direction: two-way Outgoing Display? n
Dial Access? n Busy Threshold: 10 Night Service:
Queue Length: 0 Country: 1 Incoming Destination: attd
Comm Type: voice Auth Code? n Digit Absorption List:
Prefix-1? y Trunk Flash? n Toll Restricted? y
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: ground-start
Outgoing Dial Type: tone Cut-Through? n
Trunk Termination: rc Disconnect Timing(msec): 500
Auto Guard? n Call Still Held? n Sig Bit Inversion: none
Analog Loss Group: 6 Digital Loss Group: 11
Trunk Gain: high
Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n Cyclical Hunt? y
Answer Supervision Timeout: 10 Receive Answer Supervision? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
143Miscellaneous Translations
Assigning DID Numbers to Guest Rooms
(Switch)
Front desk personnel can assign a DID number to a guest room when the guest
checks in, or at any time during the guest’s stay. A DID number gives the guest a
direct phone number to his or her room that can be shared with family or business
associates. A DID number also enhances guest security by allowing people to
contact guests without giving out the guest room number. The DID number can be
dialed as an extension from within the property, or as a 7- or 10-digit number by
callers outside of the property. These numbers are selected from a block of DID
numbers purchased by the customer from the customer’s local telephone
company.
DID numbers can be assigned to guest rooms using two different features:
■Automatic Selection of DID Numbers, or
■Custom Selection of VIP DID numbers.
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers allows the switch to automatically assign a
DID number to a guest room when the guest checks in. The switch selects the
DID numbers from an administered set of DID numbers that have been
designated for automatic assignment. The numbers are selected on a rotating
basis, with the oldest DID number assigned with each new check-in. After the
switch assigns a DID number, the number can be viewed and changed manually
from an attendant console or backup telephone. The pool of DID numbers used
for this feature is separate from the pool of numbers used for the Custom
Selection of VIP DID Numbers feature.
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers allows the switch to assign a special DID
number to a guest room when a guest checks in. The front desk personnel select
the DID numbers from an administered set of DID numbers that have been
designated for custom, or repeat, assignment. This feature is used for VIP guests
that wish to have the same DID number every time they check in to the property.
After a DID number is assigned, the number can be viewed and changed
manually from an attendant console or backup telephone. The pool of DID
numbers used for this feature is separate from the pool of numbers used for the
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers feature.
These features work when checking in either from the attendant console or
backup telephone, or when checking in using a PMS, as long as the PMS
software has been updated to use this feature. The switch PMS messages have
been changed to allow the PMS to request a DID number, which the switch sends
as part of the check-in response (automatic selection) or as a separate message
(custom selection). See the
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Property
Management System Interface Specifications
(555-231-601, Issue 3 or later) for
more details.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
144Miscellaneous Translations
To administer this feature, do the following:
■Enable the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers and the Custom Selection
of VIP DID Numbers features.
■Assign one block of extensions to be used as automatic DID numbers and
a different block of extensions to be used as custom DID numbers.
■Assign VIP Check-In, DID View, and DID Remove buttons on the attendant
console and backup telephones.
Enabling Automatic and Custom Selection
of DID Numbers
Use the change system-parameters hospitality command, Page 2, to enable
these features. You can have Automatic Selection of DID Numbers enabled
without using Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers, but you cannot have
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers without enabling Automatic Selection of
DID numbers.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Dual Wakeups? y Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? y
VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes: 5
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? y
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report: 12:00:am
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report: 12:30:am
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report: 12:45:am
Announcement Type: silence
Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement: 30
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: 399
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis:
Display Room Information in Call Display? n
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers? y
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers? y
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix? n
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path: 3
Digit to Insert/Delete:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
145Miscellaneous Translations
Assigning the DID Numbers
Use the add station XXXX command to assign the DID numbers. Use a block of
unassigned extensions from the switch numbering plan. The DID numbers must
match the DID numbers assigned by the customer’s telephone company. To
maintain consistency, the extension length on the switch must match the
extension length of the DID numbers assigned by the telephone company.
The quantity and management of DID numbers assigned is up to the customer.
The customer may want to limit the quantity of DID numbers assigned, or have the
ability to give out a DID number to every guest. If the customer wants to use both
automatic and custom selection of DID numbers, they must have one set of
automatic DID numbers and another set of custom DID numbers. When assigning
the DID numbers, do not use a COS that has the Client Room feature enabled.
This prevents someone from accidentally checking in or checking out a DID
telephone number.
The following examples show and XDID and XDIDVIP station assignment.
When you first assign the DID numbers, the Hunt-to Station field does not
have an assignment (it is a display-only field). When a DID number is assigned to
a guest room extension when the guest checks in, that guest room extension is
then displayed in the Hunt-to Station field of the assigned DID number. Use
the list station type xdid or list station type xdidvip commands to list the DID
number assignments.
After you assign one DID number, use the duplicate station XXXX command to
create the rest of your DID numbers. Duplication can be used for only one station
type at a time (XDID or XIDVIP, but not both at the same time).
add station 6000 Page 1 of 1
STATION
Extension: 6000 BCC: 0
Type: xdid TN: 1
Coverage Path 1: 5 COR: 1
Name: Coverage Path 2: COS: 10
Hunt-to Station:
add station 6224 Page 1 of 1
STATION
Extension: 6224 BCC: 0
Type: xdidvip TN: 1
Coverage Path 1: 5 COR: 1
Name: Coverage Path 2: COS: 10
Hunt-to Station:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
146Miscellaneous Translations
Assigning DID Number Feature Buttons
Assign the following feature buttons to use the DID number features:
■did-view
■did-remove
■vip-chkin.
These buttons can be assigned to attendant consoles and backup telephones
with console permissions. See “Attendant Console Button Layouts (Switch)” on
page 106 and “Backup Telephone Button Layouts (Switch)” on page 116 for more
information.
Considerations
■Call Coverage
Calls using a DID number will cover to the guest’s coverage path as if the
guest’s extension was dialed.
■Call Coverage for Unassigned DID Numbers
Assign a special Call Coverage path for all DID numbers. This coverage
should terminate to the attendant or to a recording stating that the number
dialed is no longer in use. When the DID number is assigned to a guest
room, the coverage follows the path for that guest. When the DID number
is not being used, the call will go to the attendant or to a recording.
If the coverage goes to a special mailbox on the voice mail system, you can
administer the system so the caller can dial 0 to get the front desk. For
example, the recording could say “Thank you for calling the ABC Hotel.
The guest you have called is no longer available at this number. Please
press 0 for assistance.”
■Call Detail Recording
Incoming calls are recorded for the DID number, not the room extension
number. Billing for incoming calls to DID numbers must be coordinated with
the call accounting system vendor.
■Call Vectoring
You cannot route a vector step to an xdid or xdidvip station type.
■Collect Calls
In general, collect calls to DID guest room numbers should not be allowed.
Check with your local telephone company to see if the incoming trunks can
be administered to deny collect calls to the guest rooms.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
147Miscellaneous Translations
■Number Rotation for Automatic Selection of DID Numbers
Initially, the DID numbers are assigned during check-in in the order in
which they were administered on the switch. Over time, that order will
become more random, depending on the length of each guest’s stay.
This rotation of numbers is not used for Custom Selection of VIP DID
Numbers since those numbers are manually assigned.
■Save Translations
The DID number assignments are saved in translations (either when done
manually or during the automatic save every night). Any system resets of
level 3 or higher will lose DID number check-in assignments since the last
save.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
148Miscellaneous Translations
Automatic Wakeup Options (Switch)
Automatic Wakeup is a standard feature when hospitality is enabled on the
Customer Options form. In addition to the standard single wakeup option set up
by front desk personnel, the following options are available for the Automatic
Wakeup feature:
■Dual Wakeup
Dual wakeup calls can be set up by front desk personnel, or by the guest
when using the Wakeup Activation via Tones feature.
■Daily Wakeup
Daily wakeup calls can only be set up by front desk personnel.
■VIP Wakeup, including the maximum number of VIP Wakeup requests
allowed during a 5-minute interval
VIP wakeup calls can only be set up by front desk personnel.
■Wakeup Activation via Tones
This feature allows a guest to set up wakeup calls without having to use the
Speech Synthesizer circuit pack.
NOTE:
If Wakeup Activation via Tones is enabled, the wakeup feature
provided by a Speech Synthesizer circuit pack is disabled from
service.
■If a wakeup call is not acknowledged by the guest answering the call, the
switch keeps track of these failed wakeups. Use the Extension to
Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages field to assign a message
waiting lamp to notify front desk personnel when this happens. See more
about this in “Attendant Console Button Layouts (Switch)” on page 106 and
“Backup Telephone Button Layouts (Switch)” on page 116.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
149Miscellaneous Translations
■The speech synthesizer circuit pack allows a guest to set up a wakeup call.
If the speech synthesizer is unavailable (busy or out of service), you can
administer a backup extension that will receive those wakeup call requests
so that they can still be entered into the system. Use the Routing
Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis field to administer a
front desk extension that can take those wakeup requests.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Dual Wakeups? y Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? y
VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes: 5
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? y
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report:
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report:
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report:
Announcement Type: mult-integ
Default Announcement Extension: 380
Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement: 30
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: 399
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis: 300
Display Room Information in Call Display? n
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers? y
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers? y
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix? n
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path: 3
Digit to Insert/Delete:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
150Miscellaneous Translations
Call Vectoring (Switch)
NOTE:
If you use a vector to route calls to a location outside of your hotel, the COR
of the vector must route using its own ARS restricted partition to prevent toll
fraud, and the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) should be set to 0.
The Call Vectoring feature is used to set up the Automated Attendant feature for
incoming calls to the hotel. Coordinate this administration with your customer. To
set up an automated attendant, you will need a recorded announcement circuit
pack (TN750C), and you will need to record announcements (see page 133).
You must first assign a vector directory number (VDN) using the add vdn XXXX
command. The extension number XXXX is an unused extension on the switch.
You can have up to 20 VDNs depending on the capacity of the system (
R8
csi/si
is 10;
R8
r is 20). One of the VDNs is usually the published telephone number for
the hotel. A second VDN could be used by hotel guests to provide a menu of
information about hotel services and events. After you add a VDN, you can later
change the VDN if needed. For more information about vectors, see the
DEFINITY BCS and GuestWorks Call Vectoring Guide.
The next step is to create the vector used by callers to access different numbers
at the hotel. The following example shows an auto-attendant vector.
change vector 1 Page 1 of 3
CALL VECTOR
Number: 1 Name auto-attd-1
Attendant Vectoring? n Lock? n
Basic? y EAS? n G3V4 Enhanced? n ANI/II-Digits? n ASAI Routing? n
Prompting? y LAI? n G3V4 Adv Route? n CINFO? n BSR? n Holidays? y
01 wait-time 2 secs hearing ringback
02 collect 1 digits after announcement 381
03
04 route-to number 0 with cov n if digit = 0
05 route-to number 105 with cov n if digit = 1
06 goto step 12 if digits = 2
07 route-to number 699 with cov n if digit = 3
08 goto step 20 if digits = 4
09 goto step 16 if digits = 5
10 route-to number 0 with cov n if unconditionally
11
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
151Miscellaneous Translations
This vector does the following:
1. The caller hears ringback for 2 seconds.
2. Announcement 381 plays. This announcement asks callers to do one of
the following:
■Press or wait if they want the front desk; if they press or wait
for the timeout, they are routed to the front desk.
■Press if they want the reservation desk; if they press , they are
routed to extension 105, which is the reservations desk.
■Press if they know the guest room extension; if they press ,
they are routed to announcement 382, which tells them to dial the
guest room extension.
■Press if they want to retrieve their voice messages; if they press
, the call is routed to the voice messaging system.
■Press if they know the department they wish to access (such as
catering); if they press , they are routed to announcement 383,
which gives them a listing of several extensions at the hotel that they
can dial directly.
■Press to start over again; if they press , the caller hears
announcement 381, which repeats all of the options.
■If the caller dials anything else, the call is routed to the front desk.
change vector 1 Page 2 of 3
CALL VECTOR
12 collect 3 digits after announcement 382
13 route-to digits with coverage y
14 route-to number 0 with cov n if unconditionally
15
16 goto step 2 if unconditionally
17
18
19
20 collect 3 digits after announcement 383
21 goto step 13 if unconditionally
22
0 0
1 1
2 2
3
3
4
4
5 5
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
152Miscellaneous Translations
Attendant Vectoring (Switch)
Attendant Vectoring enables a set of commands used to write vectors for calls
routed to attendant consoles. When Attendant Vectoring is enabled, all attendant-
seeking calls using a VDN are processed using the call vectors, not the normal
attendant console “dial 0” call routing.
The main reason to use Attendant Vectoring is to allow flexible routing of
attendant-seeking calls. If users are instructed to dial an attendant VDN, the call
could be answered by an attendant, but it may also be covered to the voice
mailbox of a night station. Training users to understand these different call routing
options is something you should consider before using Attendant Vectoring.
If you use Attendant Vectoring and night service to route calls to a voice mail
system, you can also use the Automatic Message Waiting feature to notify after-
hours personnel that there are messages in the night service station mailbox by
assigning an AMW lamp on one or more backup telephones. When personnel see
that there are new messages, they can check those messages after hours and act
upon them as needed.
Attendant vectors are set up no differently than regular vectors, except that you
designate the vector as an attendant vector. The following screen shows an
attendant vector.
change vector 5 Page 1 of 3
CALL VECTOR
Number: 5 Name attd-vector
Attendant Vectoring? y Lock? n
Basic? y EAS? n G3V4 Enhanced? n ANI/II-Digits? n ASAI Routing? n
Prompting? y LAI? n G3V4 Adv Route? n CINFO? n BSR? n Holidays? y
01 wait 0 secs hearing
02 goto step 8 if time-of-day is all 12:00 to 13:00
03 queue-to attd-group
04 goto step 8 if queue-fail
05 announcement 9000
06 wait 15 seconds hearing music
07 goto step 5 if unconditionally
08 queue-to attendant 6000
09 goto step 11 if queue-fail
10 wait 999 secs hearing ringback
11 route-to number 93035381000 with cov y if unconditionally
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
153Miscellaneous Translations
Dial by Name (Switch)
The Dial by Name feature allows you to “dial” someone by entering the person’s
name from your touch-tone keypad. This feature is accessible by using the Call
Vectoring feature and recorded announcements (see page 133) to create an auto-
attendant procedure where one option allows callers to enter a person’s name
instead of the person’s extension number. The system processes the name
characters received, and, when a single match is found, the number is dialed
automatically. For more information about Dial by Name and vectoring, see the
DEFINITY BCS and GuestWorks Call Vectoring Guide.
The Dial by Name feature
is available only on GuestWorks and DEFINITY BCS.
You must first assign a VDN using the add vdn XXXX command. The extension
number XXXX is an unused extension on the switch. You can have up to 20 VDNs
depending on the capacity of the system (
R8
csi/si is 10;
R8
r is 20). The VDN used
for Dial by Name would be the published telephone number for the hotel.
The next step is to create the vector that enables the Dial by Name feature. The
following example shows a vector that includes steps for Dial by Name.
change vector 2 Page 1 of 3
CALL VECTOR
Number: 2 Name: Dial by Name
Attendant Vectoring? y Lock? n
Basic? y EAS? n G3V4 Enhanced? n ANI/II-Digits? n ASAI Routing? n
Prompting? y LAI? n G3V4 Adv Route? n CINFO? n BSR? n Holidays? y
01 wait-time 2 secs hearing ringback
02 collect 1 digits after announcement 381
03
04 route-to number 0 with cov n if digit = 0
05 route-to number 105 with cov n if digit = 1
06 goto step 12 if digits = 2
07 goto step 21 if digits = 3
08 goto step 19 if digits = 4
09 goto step 16 if digits = 5
10 route-to number 0 with cov n if unconditionally
11
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
154Miscellaneous Translations
change vector 2 Page 2 of 3
CALL VECTOR
12 collect 3 digits after announcement 382
13 route-to digits with coverage y
14 route-to number 0 with cov n if unconditionally
15
16 goto step 2 if unconditionally
17
18
19 collect 3 digits after announcement 383
20 goto step 13 if unconditionally
21 collect 4 digits after announcement 661
22 route-to name1 with coverage y
change vector 2 Page 3 of 3
CALL VECTOR
23 goto step 30 if nomatch
24 collect 11 digits after announcement 662
25 route-to name2 with coverage y
26 goto step 30 if nomatch
27 collect 2 digits after announcement 663
28 route-to name3 with coverage y
29 goto step 30 if nomatch
30 collect 1 digits after announcement 660
31 goto step 21 if digits = 1
32 route-to number 0 with cov n if unconditionally
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
155Miscellaneous Translations
This Dial by Name vector does the following:
1. The caller hears ringback for 2 seconds.
2. Announcement 381 plays. This announcement instructs the caller to do
one of the following:
■Press or wait if the caller wants the operator; if the caller presses
or waits for the timeout, the caller is routed to the operator.
■Press if the caller wants the front desk; if the caller presses ,
the caller is routed to extension 105, which is the front desk.
■Press if the caller knows the person’s extension; if the caller
presses , the caller is routed to announcement 382, which tells
the caller to dial the person’s extension.
■Press if the caller knows the person’s name; if the caller presses
, the following sub-procedure occurs:
a. Announcement 661 plays requesting that the caller enter the
first four letters of the person’s last name.
If there is a single match, the call is redirected.
If there are multiple matches, continue with Step b.
If there is no match, go to Step d.
b. Announcement 662 plays requesting that the caller enter the
rest of the person’s last name, followed by the key.
If there is a single match, the call is redirected.
If there are multiple matches, continue with Step c.
If there is no match, go to Step d.
c. Announcement 663 plays requesting that the caller enter the
first two letters of the person’s first name.
If there is a single match, the call is redirected.
If there is no match, continue with Step d.
d. Since there are no matches, announcement 660 plays telling
the caller that they can press to try again, or press to
get an operator.
■Press if the caller knows the department (such as housekeeping)
the caller wishes to access. If the caller presses , the caller is
routed to announcement 383, which gives the caller a listing of
several departments that the caller can dial directly.
■Press to start over again; if the caller presses , the caller hears
announcement 381, which repeats all of the options.
■If the caller dials anything else, the call is routed to the operator.
0
0
1 1
2
2
3
3
#
1 0
4
4
5 5
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
156Miscellaneous Translations
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Switch)
Use the change system-parameters features command to enable Trunk-to-
Trunk Transfer only if it is requested by the customer. This feature is normally
disabled because of the possibility of toll fraud.
!CAUTION:
If Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is enabled, calls made to guest rooms can be
transferred outside of the hotel, and toll charges may be lost for some calls.
change system-parameters features Page 1 of 10
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Self Station Display Enabled? y
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer: none
Automatic Callback - No Answer Timeout Interval (rings): 3
Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes): 10
Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval (seconds): 20
AAR/ARS Dial Tone Required? y
Music/Tone on Hold: music Port: 01B1101
Music (or Silence) on Transferred Trunk Calls? no
DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment: attd
Messaging Service Adjunct (MSA) Connected? n
Internal Automatic Answer for Attendant Extended Calls? n
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled? y
ACA Referral Calls: local
ACA Referral Destination: attd
ACA Short Holding Time Originating Extension: 3070
ACA Long Holding Time Originating Extension: 3070
Abbreviated Dial Programming by Assigned Lists? n
Auto Abbreviated/Delayed Transition Interval (rings): 2
Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals: Bellcore
Display Calling Number for Room to Room Caller ID Calls? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
157Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Table 11 is a checklist of the translations and tests that must be done to
administer the switch-to-INTUITY link.
Switch-to-INTUITY Messaging Link
There are three ways you can set up the messaging link between the switch and
the INTUITY:
■TCP/IP signaling (page 158)
■X.25 signaling (page 174)
■Mode Code integration (page 181).
This link requires administration on the switch and the INTUITY.
Table 11. Checklist for Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
✔Description Reference
Switch-to-INTUITY Messaging Link — Depending on the
hardware, use only one of these three configurations:
- TCP/IP signaling
- X.25 signaling
- Mode Code integration
page 158
page 174
page 181
Voice ports (switch) page 183
Hunt groups for the voice ports (switch) page 186
Extensions for guest message retrieval (switch) page 188
Coverage paths to route calls to INTUITY AUDIX (switch) page 189
Voice port extensions, channels, and services (INTUITY) page 190
Services to phone number mapping (INTUITY) page 192
Attendant and administrator passwords (INTUITY) page 193
Test the switch-to-INTUITY voice ports page 194
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
158Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
TCP/IP Signaling
The TCP/IP signaling link requires administration on both the switch and the
INTUITY. Any switch type (csi, si or r) can use a TCP/IP link. The TCP/IP link
supports the PMS Interface for GuestWorks (see page 196). This section includes
procedures for testing the link.
TCP/IP Link (Switch)
On the switch, you must do the following to administer the TCP/IP link:
1. Assign the bus bridge (
csi
systems only)
2. Assign node names
3. Assign IP interfaces
4. Assign an ethernet data module
5. Assign a processor interface channel
6. Assign IP routes (if needed).
Assign the Bus Bridge (csi Systems Only)
Using the change system-parameters maintenance command, Page 2, verify
that the Bus Bridge Packet Interface 2 has been enabled for the C-LAN circuit
pack. If it is not already assigned, enter the C-LAN circuit pack equipment
location, and use the defaults for the Timeslot Port fields as shown below.
change system-parameter maintenance Page 2 of 4
MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification )
TTRs: 4 CPTRs: 1 Call Classifier Ports:
MMIs: 0 VCs:
TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST (Extension)
Test Type 100: Test Type 102: Test Type 105:
ISDN MAINTENANCE
ISDN-PRI TEST CALL Extension: ISDN BRI Service SPID:
DS1 MAINTENANCE
DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension:
LOSS PLAN (Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required)
Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss:
SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS
Packet Intf1? y Packet Intf2? y
Bus Bridge: 03C05 Inter-Board Link Timeslots Pt0: 6 Pt1: 1 Pt2: 1
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
159Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Assign Node Names
Using the change node-names audix-msa command, assign a node name and
IP address for the INTUITY system. For this example, the INTUITY system is
named audix, and the IP address is 192.168.1.70. Any 192.168.x.x IP address is
a non-public IP address. If you have a dedicated link to the switch, use the
address shown in this example. If you are using the customer’s network, you may
need to use a different address. If using the customer’s network, make sure that
the IP addresses assigned here are unique within the network.
Using the change node-names ip command, assign a node name and IP
address for the switch. In this example, the switch is named guestworks, and the
IP address is 192.168.1.10. The IP address in the example is a non-public
address. Use this IP address if you are installing a dedicated direct link between
the switch and the INTUITY system. The default node name entry is display-only
and is not used for this application. You can add the node names in any order on
this screen; the next time you display the node names, they will be in alphabetical
order.
If the connection is going through a router instead of being a direct connection,
you must also assign a node name to the router and enter the router’s IP address.
In this example, the router is named router, and the IP address is 192.168.1.211.
change node-names audix-msa Page 1 of 1
AUDIX-MSA NODE NAMES
Audix Names IP Address MSA Names IP Address
audix 192.168.1 .70 msa
change node-names ip Page 1 of 1
IP NODE NAMES
Name IP Address Name IP Address
default 0 .0 .0 .0 . . .
guestworks 192.168.1 .10 . . .
router 192.168.1 .211 . . .
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
... ...
( 3 of 3 administered node-names were displayed )
Use ‘list node-names’ command to see all the administered node-names
Use ‘change node-names ip xxx’ to change a node-name ‘xxx’ or add a node-name
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
160Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Assign IP Interfaces
Use the change ip-interfaces command to administer a C-LAN circuit pack as an
IP interface.
■Enable Eth Pt — Enter y to enable the C-LAN IP interface. After initial
administration, you must disable the interface before you make any
changes.
■Type — Enter C-LAN.
■Slot — Enter the equipment location of the C-LAN circuit pack.
■Code/Sfx — This is a display-only field that shows the designation
number of the circuit pack installed in the specified slot.
■Node Name — Enter the switch node name assigned on Page 2 of the
Node Names screen. In this example, enter guestworks. The same node
name cannot be assigned to two different IP interfaces.
■Subnet Mask — Identifies which portion of an IP address is a network
address and which is a host identifier. Use the default entry
of 255.255.255.0, or check with the LAN administrator on site if connecting
through the customer’s LAN.
■Gateway Address — Enter the address of a network node that will serve
as the default gateway for the IP interface. If the application goes to points
off the subnet, a gateway address of the router is required. If the switch and
the INTUITY are on the same subnet, a gateway address is not required. If
using ethernet only, and a gateway address is administered, no IP routes
are required.
■Network Region — For a C-LAN IP interface, enter 1.
change ip-interfaces Page 1 of 4
IP INTERFACES
Enable Net
Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Address Rgn
y C-LAN 01A02 TN799 C guestworks 255.255.255.0 192.168.1 .255 1
n 255.255.255.0 . . .
n 255.255.255.0 . . .
n 255.255.255.0 . . .
n 255.255.255.0 . . .
n 255.255.255.0 . . .
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
161Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Assign an Ethernet Data Module
Use the add data-module command to administer an ethernet data module. If
you are changing options on an existing data module, you must disable the link
before you make any changes.
■Data Extension — Use an unassigned extension number.
■Type — Enter ethernet.
■Port — Enter the equipment location of the C-LAN circuit pack. For the
ethernet link, you will always use circuit number 17.
■Link — Select a TCP/IP link number (1-25 for
csi/si
, 1-33 for
r
). For most
systems, use link 1. This entry is also used on the Processor Channel
screen.
■Name — Enter a name for the data module. This name will display when
you list the assigned data modules.
■BCC — A display-only field.
■Network uses 1’s for Broadcast Address — This sets the host
portion of the IP address to 0’s or 1’s. The default is yes (all 1’s). Use the
default for this installation.
add data-module 2000 Page 1 of 1
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 2000 Name: ethernet data module
Type: ethernet
Port: 01A0217
Link: 1
Network uses 1’s for Broadcast Addresses? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
162Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Assign a Processor Interface Channel
Use the change communication-interface processor-channels command to
assign a processor interface channel.
■Proc Chan — Select a processor channel for this link. Use the first
channel available.
■Enable — Enter y.
■Appl — Enter audix.
■Gtwy To — Not used for the AUDIX application.
■Mode — Enter s (for server).
■Interface Link — Enter the TCP/IP link number used on the ethernet
data module screen. For this series of examples, link 1 was used.
■Interface Chan — Enter the TCP channel number (5002
or 6001-6999). This must match the TCP Port field of the INTUITY
Switch Interface Administration screen. The recommended entry for an
INTUITY system is 5002.
■Destination Node — Enter the node name for the INTUITY system as
assigned on the Node Names screen. In these examples, audix is used.
■Destination Port — Use the default of 0.
■Session Local — Enter 1. This field must match the Local Node
Number field on the switch dial plan.
■Session Remote — Enter 1. This field must match the AUDIX Number
field on the INTUITY Switch Interface Administration screen.
■Mach ID — Enter 1. This field must match the AUDIX Number field on
the INTUITY Switch Interface Administration screen.
change communication-interface processor-channels Page 1 of 8
PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach
Chan Enable Appl. To Mode Link/Chan Node Port Local/Remote ID
1: y audix s 1 5002 audix 0 1 1 1
2: n
3: n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
163Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Assign IP Routes (if needed)
Use the add ip-route command to set up the IP route(s) from the switch to the
INTUITY system. This is required only when:
■The switch and the INTUITY are on different subnets, or
■When a Gateway address is not administered for the C-LAN IP interface.
Administer the following fields for each IP route:
■Route Number — If you are going through a router, you must set up IP
route 1 from the switch to the router, and then set up IP route 2 from the
switch to the INTUITY system.
■Destination Node — This field represents the node name of the
destination for this route. You would typically enter the node name for the
INTUITY system or a router, depending on your configuration.
■Gateway — Enter the node name of the gateway by which the destination
node is reached for this route. This is either the local C-LAN port or the first
intermediate node between the C-LAN port and the final destination. For
example, if there were one or more routers between the C-LAN port and
the final destination node (the INTUITY system), the gateway would be the
node name of the first router.
■C-LAN Board — Enter the equipment location of the C-LAN circuit pack
that provides this route. It is possible to have more than one C-LAN circuit
pack, but hospitality configurations will only use one C-LAN circuit pack.
■Metric — This field specifies the complexity of this IP route. Enter 0 if
there are no intermediate nodes between the switch C-LAN port and the
LAN circuit card on the INTUITY. A metric value of 1 is used only on a
switch that has more than one C-LAN circuit pack installed.
This example shows a simple IP route without any intermediate nodes.
add ip-route 1 page 1 of 1
IP ROUTING
Route Number: 1
Destination Node: audix
Gateway: guestworks
C-LAN Board: 01A02
Metric: 0
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
164Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
These next two examples show how you might set up a pair of IP routes when
there is one intermediate router in the link.
add ip-route 1 page 1 of 1
IP ROUTING
Route Number: 1
Destination Node: router
Gateway: guestworks
C-LAN Board: 01A02
Metric: 0
add ip-route 2 page 1 of 1
IP ROUTING
Route Number: 2
Destination Node: audix
Gateway: guestworks
C-LAN Board: 01A02
Metric: 0
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
165Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
TCP/IP Link (INTUITY)
On the INTUITY, you must do the following for the TCP/IP link:
■Administer the TCP/IP networking
NOTE:
Before you can administer the TCP/IP networking, the TCP/IP
feature must be enabled on the customer features window.
Technical support must dial in and enable TCP/IP if it is not
enabled.
■Configure the LAN circuit card
■Select a switch type (R4.4 only)
■Administer the switch interface
■Reboot the INTUITY system (R4.4 only).
Administer the TCP/IP Networking (R4.4)
Use the Networking Administration > TCP/IP Administration command to
access the TCP/IP administration.
NOTE:
If this administration is already complete, verify that the settings are
accurate for your installation.
■UNIX Machine Name — Enter the UNIX name for the INTUITY system.
This name is case-sensitive.
■IP Address — Enter the IP address for the INTUITY system. From the
previous examples, use 192.168.1.70 if using a dedicated private link.
■Subnet Mask — Use the default of 255.255.255.0.
■Default Gateway IP Address — This is an optional field. Leave it
blank.
+-------------------------------------------------+
+ TCP/IP Administration +
+-------------------------------------------------+
| UNIX Machine Name: map5p |
||
| IP Address: 192.168.1.70 |
||
| Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 |
||
| Default Gateway IP Address: |
+-------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
166Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Administer the TCP/IP Networking (R5)
Use the TCP/IP Administration > Network Addressing command to access the
TCP/IP administration.
NOTE:
If this administration is already complete, verify that the settings are
accurate for your installation.
■TCP/IP Interface — Use the default eeE_0.
■Host Name — Enter the UNIX name for the INTUITY system. This name is
case-sensitive.
■IP Address — Enter the IP address for the INTUITY system. From the
previous examples, use 192.168.1.70 if using a dedicated private link.
■Subnet Mask — Use the default of 255.255.255.0.
■Default Gateway Address — This is an optional field. Leave it blank.
Configure the LAN Circuit Card (R4.4)
After adding the TCP/IP administration, press to change the function key
display, then press to select the LAN circuit card configuration. This should be
set to 10BASE-T. After selecting this option, press to save the change. The
circuit card configuration is displayed. Press to exit the display.
Configure the LAN Circuit Card (R5)
After adding the TCP/IP administration, press to return to the INTUITY Main
Menu. Use the TCP/IP Administration > Network Interface Card Set-up
command.
■Card Type — Set this field to PRO100B.
■Network Media Type — Set this field to Auto-Detect.
After setting these options, press to save the change.
+-------------------------------------------------------+
+ Network Addressing +
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| TCP/IP Interface: eeE_0 |
| Host Name: map5p |
| IP Address: 192.168.1.70 |
| Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 |
| Default Gateway Address: |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
F8
F2
F3
F6
F6
F3
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
167Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Select a Switch Type (R4.4 only)
Use the Switch Interface Administration > Switch Selection command to
access the switch selection administration.
■Country — Enter the country where this system is installed.
■Switch — Enter DEFINITY OVERLAN.
Administer the Switch Interface (R4.4 and R5)
Use the Switch Interface Administration > Call Data Interface Administration
> Switch Link Administration command to access the switch link administration.
■Extension Length — Enter the extension length from the switch dial
plan.
■Host Switch Number — Enter 1.
■AUDIX Number — Enter 1. This must match the Machine ID setting on
the Processor Channel screen.
■Switch Number — Enter 1.
■IP Address/Host Name — Enter the IP address of the switch. In this
example, use 192.168.1.10. This must match the IP address from the
switch Node Names screen.
+-------------------------------------------------+
+ Switch Selection +
+-------------------------------------------------+
||
||
||
| Country: UNITED STATES |
||
||
||
| Switch: DEFINITY OVERLAN |
||
||
||
+-------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
168Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
■TCP Port — Enter the TCP port number (5002 or 6001-6999). This must
match the Interface Channel field of the switch Processor Channel
screen. The default for an INTUITY system is 5002.
Reboot the INTUITY System (R4.4 Only)
You must now reboot the INTUITY system. This is not required on an R5 system.
1. Use the Customer/Services Administration > System Management >
System Control > Shutdown System command to shut down the
INTUITY system.
2. When the system asks for a number of seconds to wait before shutdown,
enter 0. Follow the shutdown instructions to bring the system back up.
3. After bringing the system up, start up the voice system and then continue
with link testing.
NOTE:
If you change any INTUITY system IP addresses on an R4.4 system after
doing this administration, you must reboot the system before the link will
come up.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Switch Link Administration +
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Switch Link Type: LAN Country: UNITED STATES |
| Extension Length: 3 Switch: DEFINITY OVERLAN |
| Host Switch Number: 1 |
| AUDIX Number: 1 |
| |
|Switch IP Address/ TCP Switch IP Address/ TCP |
|Number Host Name Port Number Host Name Port |
| 1 192.168.1.10 5002 |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
169Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Testing the TCP/IP Link
The following tests can be run from the switch to test the link to the INTUITY:
■ping node-name
name
board
CCs
[packet-length
YYYY
repeat
ZZZ
],
where
name
is the INTUITY node name;
CCs
is the equipment location of
the C-LAN circuit pack;
YYYY
is the size of the test packet; and
ZZZ
is the
number of times that the test will be repeated. The packet length defaults to
64 bytes, with a maximum of 1500 bytes.
■ping ip-address
address
board
CCs
[packet-length
YYYY
repeat
ZZZ
],
where
address
is the INTUITY IP address;
CCs
is the equipment location
of the C-LAN circuit pack;
YYYY
is the size of the test packet; and
ZZZ
is
the number of times that the test will be repeated. The packet length
defaults to 64 bytes, with a maximum of 1500 bytes.
■status processor-channels
X
, where
X
is the ethernet link number.
ping node-name audix board 01B10
PING RESULTS
End-pt Node-name Port Port Type Result Time(ms) Error Code
audix 01B1017 ETH-PT PASS 8
ping ip-address 192.168.1.70 board 01B10
PING RESULTS
End-pt ip Port Port Type Result Time(ms) Error Code
192.168.1.70 01B1017 ETH-PT PASS 8
status processor-channels 1
PROCESSOR-CHANNEL STATUS
Channel Number: 1
Session Layer Status: In Service
Socket Status: Established TCP
Link Number: 1
Link Type: ethernet
Message Buffer Number: 0
Last Failure: Far end sent disconnect message
At: 05/10/99 20:24
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
170Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
■status link
X
, where
X
is the TCP/IP link number. In this example of
Page 1, the system shows that the link is connected and that the link is in
service.
Page 2 shows the error counts.
Page 3 shows whether the link is up or down. If the link is not up, there is a
problem somewhere in translations or connectivity.
■status data-module
XXXX
, where
XXXX
is the extension number of the
ethernet data module. This shows which port is connected and if the port is
in service.
status link 1 Page 1 of 4
LINK/PORT STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: connected
Link Type: ethernet
Link Name: ethernet data module
Service Port Location: 01B1017
Service Port Data Extension: 2000
Service Stats: in-service/active
Node Name: guestworks
Source IP Address: 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Broadcast Address: 192.168.1 .255
Physical Address: ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
Enabled? yes
Maintenance Busy? no
Active Channels: 1
status link 1 Page 3 of 4
PROCESSOR CHANNEL STATUS
UP: 001
status data-module 3100
DATA-MODULE STATUS
Data Ext/Stn Ext for Stn DM: 3100 Service State: in-service/active
Port/Channel Number: 01B1017 Maintenance Busy? no
CF Destination Ext:
Connected Ports:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
171Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
■trace-route ip-address
address
board
CCs
, where
address
is the
INTUITY IP address, and
CCs
is the equipment location of the C-LAN
circuit pack. The command displays the hops traversed from source to
destination, along with the IP addresses of the hop points and final
destination, and the observed round-trip delay from the source to each hop
point. If no reply is received from a hop point, the IP address is blank.
■list measurements clan ethernet
CCs
, where
CCs
is the cabinet, carrier,
and slot number of the C-LAN circuit pack. This command displays Cyclic
Redundancy Check and collision counts for the past 24 hours in 15-minute
intervals. N/A is displayed if the data cannot be retrieved for any interval.
trace-route ip-address 192.168.1.70 board 1b10
TRACE ROUTE RESULTS
Hop Time(ms) IP Address
0 Start Addr: 192.168.1.10
1 15, 15, 12 192.168.1.15
2 23, 26, 26 192.168.1.12
3 23, 25, 25 192.168.1.70
list measurements clan ethernet 1b10 Page 1 of 3
Switch Name: guestworks Date: 3:50 pm TUE AUG 17, 1999
C-LAN ETHERNET PERMORMANCE MEASUREMENT DETAILED REPORT
Date Time CRC CHECK Collision Count
total delta total delta
02/01 03:08 650 50 650 250
02/01 02:53 600 600 400 400
02/01 02:38 N/A N/A N/A N/A
02/01 02:23 1000000570 20 10000000570 20
02/01 02:08 1000000550 10000000550 10000000550 10000000550
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
172Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
The following tests can be run from the INTUITY system to test the link to the
switch:
■Customer/Services Administration > Diagnostics > Switch Link
Diagnostics > Link Diagnostics
This screen is an example of a TCP/IP link. It shows the link being in
service.
If the link status and session status show DOWN, use the following function
keys to test the link:
— tests to see if the link is electrically connected. Run this test first.
If it fails, check the cabling.
— resets the link. After finished, press to refresh the link. If it still
does not come up, check the switch and INTUITY system adminis-
tration.
You can also press to change the function key labels and use the
following to control the status of the link:
— busies-out the link
— releases the link from busy-out.
■Customer/Services Administration > Diagnostics > Switch Link
Diagnostics > Session Layer Diagnostics
Press every few seconds to see if the sequence numbers increment. If
the numbers do not increment, data transfer is not taking place.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Link Diagnostics +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Switch Link Type: LAN Country: UNITED STATES |
| Switch: DEFINITY OVERLAN |
| |
| |
| Switch Link Session Switch Link Session |
| Number Status Status Number Status Status |
| 1 UP UP |
||
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
F3
F2 F5
F8
F2
F3
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Session Layer +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Switch Link Type: LAN Country: UNITED STATES |
| Switch: DEFINITY OVERLAN |
| |
| Transmit Receive Transmit Receive |
| Switch Session Sequence Sequence Switch Session Sequence Sequence|
| Number State Number Number Number State Number Number |
| 1 DATA 148 45 |
| |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
F5
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
173Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
■Customer/Services Administration > Diagnostics > TCP/IP
Diagnostics > Send & Receive Test Packets
After entering the switch IP address, press to start the test. This sends
test packets between the INTUITY and the switch. The system tests to see
whether all the packets are transmitted and whether they are transmitted in
the correct sequence. If there is high (greater than 10%) packet loss, or if
the packets are out of order, there may be network problems. While this
test is running, the yellow T/R lamp on the LAN circuit card should be
flashing.
■Customer/Services Administration > Diagnostics > TCP/IP
Diagnostics > View Packet Statistics
When using this command, you can select from a detailed report, an
interfaces report (shown below), and a routing report.
Continue with “INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)” on page 183.
F3
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Test Packet Results +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=0, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=1, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=2, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=3, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=4, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=5, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=6, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=7, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=8, time-0, ms |
|72 bytes from 192.168.X.X: icmp_seq=9, time-0, ms |
| |
|10 packets transmitted, 10 packets recieved, 0% packet loss |
|round-trip (ms) min/arg/max=0/0/0 |
| |
|Note: Hight packet loss, long round-trip time, or |
|packets received out of order (icmp-swq) may |
|indicate a network problem. |
| |
|Press Enter to continue. |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Packet Statistics +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Name Mtu Network Address Ipkts Ierrs Opkts Oerrs Collis |
| sme0 1500 192.168.1 192.168.1.10 65827 0 48865 0 0 |
| |
|Note: Abnormally high values in the Ierrs, Oerrs, |
|or Collis column may indicate a network problem. |
| |
|Press Enter to continue |
| |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
174Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
X.25 Signaling
The X.25 PI link requires administration on both the switch and the INTUITY. Only
the
si
and
r
systems can use an X.25 link. A
csi
system must use TCP/IP or Mode
Code Integration. This section includes procedures for testing the link.
X.25 Link (Switch)
Use the following procedures to administer the link between the switch and the
INTUITY for administrative voice messaging. This administration is applicable for
si
or
r
systems using a direct IDI connection.
Data Modules on an si System
Use the add data-module command on an
si
system to administer the data
module parameters for a processor interface (PI) link. For this connection, the
data modules are integrated into the TN765 PI circuit pack. Set the options as
shown, except use the correct extension, COS, and COR as set up for your
installation.
You must set the Enable Link field to n at this time. After you have set up the
processor interface channel, you must go back and enable the link.
add data-module 7991 Page 1 of 1
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 7991 Name: intuity
Type: procr-infc COS: 15 Maintenance Extension: 7995
Physical Channel: 01 COR: 50 Destination Number: eia
ITC: restricted TN: Establish Connection? y
Link: 1 DTE/DCE: DTE Connected Data Module: DCE
Enable Link? n Clocking: internal
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1:
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION:
ASSIGNED MEMBERS (Station with a data extension button for this data module)
Ext Name
1:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
175Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
The following table is an example of how you can administer the processor
interface channels (your extensions will differ). Only channel 01 will be enabled
later to handle the messaging traffic. The other channels are used for
maintenance and testing.
Data Module on an r System
Use the add data-module command on an
r
system to administer the data
module parameters for a packet gateway link. For this connection, the data
modules are integrated into the TN577 circuit pack. Set the options as shown,
except use the correct extension, COS, and COR as set up for your installation.
You must set the Enable Link field to n at this time. After you have set up the
processor interface channel, you must go back and enable the link.
Data
Extension
Physical
Channel
Maintenance
Extension
7991 01 7995
7992 02 7996
7993 03 7997
7994 04 7998
add data-module 2005 Page 1 of 2
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 2005 Name: intuity link
Type: x.25 Remote Loop-Around Test? n
Port: 01C0301 COR: 50 Destination Number: external
Baud Rate: 9600 TN: 1 Establish Connection?
Endpoint Type: adjunct DTE/DCE: dte Connected Data Module:
Link: 1 Enable Link? n Error Logging? y
Permanent Virtual Circuit? y Highest PVC Logical Channel: 64
Switched Virtual Circuit? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
176Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Processor Channels
Use the change communication-interface processor-channels command to
administer the processor channels.
■Proc Chan — Use channel 59. It is recommended that this should match
the Session Local field used for this link.
■Enable — Enter y.
■Appl — Enter audix.
■Gtwy To — Not used.
■Mode — Not used.
■Interface Link — Enter the link number used on the data module
screen.
■Interface Chan — Enter the Local Node Number as administered
on the dial plan screen.
■Destination Node — Not used.
■Destination Port — Enter 0.
■Session Local — It is recommended that this should match the
processor channel number used for this link. However, this value must
match the Switch Port field on the INTUITY Switch/DCIU Interface
Administration screen.
■Session Remote — This must match the AUDIX Number field on the
INTUITY Switch/DCIU Interface Administration screen.
■Machine-ID — This must match the AUDIX Number field on the
INTUITY Switch/DCIU Interface Administration screen.
Enabling the Data Module Link
You must now go back to the data module screen and enable the link. You should
only enable the link for channel 01, the link that handles the messaging traffic.
change communication-interface processor-channels Page 4 of 8
PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach
Chan Enable Appl. To Mode Link/Chan Node Port Local/Remote ID
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59: y audix 1 1 0 59 1 1
60:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
177Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
X.25 Link (INTUITY)
Checking the Switch Link
Use the Customer/Services Administration > Diagnostics > Switch Interface
Diagnostics command to determine if the link is active. During initial installation,
this screen should show that the link is busied out.
After pressing to change the function key labels, the following function keys
control the status of the link:
■ busies-out the link
■ releases the link from busy-out
■ performs diagnostics on the link.
Select a Switch Type (R4.4 only)
Use the Switch Interface Administration > Switch Selection command to
access the switch selection administration.
■Country — Enter the country where this system is installed.
■Switch — Enter Definity.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Diagnose Switch Link +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| STATUS SWITCH-LINK |
| |
| Type Baud State |
| DCIU 9600 Busied |
| |
| Link Level 2 is Down |
| |
| DCIU switches (In/Out of data transfer) |
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 |
| I |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
F8
F2
F3
F4
+-------------------------------------------------+
+ Switch Selection +
+-------------------------------------------------+
||
||
||
| Country: UNITED STATES |
||
||
||
| Switch: Definity |
||
||
||
+-------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
178Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Administer the Switch Interface (R4.4)
Use the Switch Interface Administration > DCIU Interface Administration
command on the INTUITY to administer the link to the switch.
■Extension Length — Enter the extension length from the switch dial
plan.
■Host Switch Number — Enter 1.
■AUDIX Number — Enter 1. This must match the Machine ID field on
the switch Processor Channel screen.
■Logical Channel — Enter 1.
■Switch Port — Enter 59. This must match the Session Local field
value on the switch Processor Channel screen.
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
+ DCIU Interface Administration +
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|Switch Link Type: DCIU Switch: Definity |
|Extension Length: 3 |
|Host Switch Number: 1 |
|AUDIX Number: 1 |
| HOST SWITCH LINK ASSIGNMENTS |
| AUDIX Port AUDIX Port |
| Switch Logical Switch Switch Logical Switch |
| Number Channel Port Number Channel Port |
| 1 1 59 2 |
| 3 4 |
| 5 6 |
| 7 8 |
| 9 10 |
| 11 12 |
| 13 14 |
| 15 16 |
| 17 18 |
| 19 20 |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
179Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Administer the Switch Interface (R5)
Use the Switch Interface Administration command on the INTUITY to
administer the link to the switch.
■Extension Length — Enter the extension length from the switch dial
plan.
■Host Switch Number — Enter 1.
■AUDIX Number — Enter 1. This must match the Machine ID field on
the switch Processor Channel screen.
■Logical Channel — Enter 1.
■Switch Port — Enter 59. This must match the Session Local field
value on the switch Processor Channel screen
Testing the X.25 Link
The following tests can be run from the switch to test the link to the INTUITY:
■status processor-channels
X
, where
X
is the X.25 link number.
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Switch Interface Administration +
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|Switch Link Type: DCIU Country: UNITED STATES |
|Extension Length: 3 Switch: Definity |
|Host Switch Number: 1 |
|AUDIX Number: 1 |
| HOST SWITCH LINK ASSIGNMENTS |
| AUDIX Port AUDIX Port |
| Switch Logical Switch Switch Logical Switch |
| Number Channel Port Number Channel Port |
| 1 1 59 2 |
| 3 4 |
| 5 6 |
| 7 8 |
| 9 10 |
| 11 12 |
| 13 14 |
| 15 16 |
| 17 18 |
| 19 20 |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
status processor-channels 1
PROCESSOR-CHANNEL STATUS
Channel Number: 59
Channel Status: In Service
Link Number: 10
Link Type: BX.25
Message Buffer Number: 0
Reset Count: 0
Retransmission Count: 0
Failure Reason:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
180Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
■status link
X
, where
X
is the X.25 link number.
The following tests can be run from the INTUITY to test the link to the switch:
■Use the command Lodging Administration, press to bring up the
command menu, and select LDG/PMS Link Restart to restart the switch-
to-INTUITY link.
■Customer/Services Administration > Diagnostics > Switch Link
Diagnostics > Link Diagnostics
This screen is an example of an X.25 link. It shows the link being in service
and the link level as up.
After pressing to change the function key labels, the following function
keys control the status of the link:
— busies-out the link
— releases the link from busy-out
— performs diagnostics on the link.
Continue with “INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)” on page 183.
status link 1 Page 1 of 3
LINK/PORT STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: connected
Link Type: x.25
Link Name: intuity link
Service Port Location: 01C0301
Service Port Data Extension: 2005
Service Stats: in-service/active
Enabled? y
Maintenance Busy? n
Active Channels: 0
CONNECTED TO:
Destination: TDMODULE Destination Port: 1C0303
Destination Status: in-service/active Destination Extension: external
AC: 1 Connected/Orig
F7
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Diagnose Switch Link +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| STATUS SWITCH-LINK |
| |
| Type Baud State |
| DCIU 9600 In Service |
| |
| Link Level 2 is Up |
| |
| DCIU switches (In/Out of data transfer) |
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 |
| I |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
F8
F2
F3
F4
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
181Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Mode Code Integration
The Mode Code Integration link requires administration on both the switch and the
INTUITY. Any switch types can use Mode Code Integration, but TCP/IP or X.25
are the recommended methods for messaging links.
Mode Code Integration Link (Switch)
Translating the Mode Code Integration link involves the following:
■Enabling the Mode Code feature
■Verifying that the default mode codes are accurate.
Mode Code Integration on the switch is described in the
DEFINITY ECS
Administrator’s Guide.
Use the display system-parameters features command, Page 5, to verify that
there is a y in the Mode Code Interface field.
change system-parameters features Page 5 of 10
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Public Network Trunks on Conference Call: 5 Auto Start? n
Conference Parties with Public Network Trunks: 6 Auto Hold? n
Conference Parties without Public Network Trunks: 6 Attendant Tone? y
Night Service Disconnect Timer (seconds): 180 Bridging Tone? n
Short Interdigit Timer (seconds): 3 Conference Tone? n
Unanswered DID Call Timer (seconds): Intrusion Tone? n
Line Intercept Tone Timer (seconds): 30 Special Dial Tone? n
Long Hold Recall Timer (seconds): 0 Mode Code Interface? y
Reset Shift Timer (seconds): 0
Station Call Transfer Recall Timer (seconds): 0
DID Busy Treatment: tone
Allow AAR/ARS Access from DID/DIOD? n
Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS? n Transfer Upon Hang-Up? n
Abort Conference Upon Hang-Up? n Abort Transfer? n
7405ND Numeric Terminal Display? n 7434ND? n
DISTINCTIVE AUDIBLE ALERTING
Internal: 1 External: 2 Priority: 3
Attendant Originated Calls: external
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
182Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Use the change system-parameters mode-code command to verify that the
default mode code parameters are correct for this installation.
Mode Code Integration (INTUITY)
Mode Code Integration on the INTUITY is described in the following documents:
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 4 MAP/5P System Installation
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Integration with System 75, DEFINITY
Generics 1 & 3, and R5/6
■
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation (CD).
Continue with “INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)” on page 183.
change system-parameters mode-code Page 1 of 1
MODE CODE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
MODE CODES (FROM SWITCH TO VMS)
Direct Inside Access: #00
Direct Dial Access - Trunk: #01
Internal Coverage: #02
External Coverage: #03
Refresh MW Lamp: #06
System In Day Service: #11
System In Night Service: #12
OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS
DTMF Duration - On (msec): 100 Off (msec): 100 Sending Delay (msec):100
VMS Hunt Group Extension:
Remote VMS Extensions - First: Second:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
183Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (Switch)
Use the add station command to administer the voice ports that are linked to the
INTUITY system. On Page 1, assign the following fields as shown:
■Extension — The extension must be in the dial plan but not assigned for
any other purpose.
■Type — Enter 2500 for the station type when using the TCP/IP or X.25 link.
Enter VMI for the station type when using Mode Code integration.
■Port — Each analog circuit pack supports 8, 16, or 24 analog voice
connections. Depending on the circuit pack and the required number of
voice ports, you may need to spread out the voice port assignments over
more than one circuit pack. For example, if you are using a 16-port circuit
pack, use no more than four ports of circuits 1-8 and four ports of circuits 9-
16 on that circuit pack. If you still need more INTUITY voice ports, select a
circuit pack that is at least one-quarter carrier distance away from the first
circuit pack. For example, if your system has 12 voice ports and you assign
the first eight ports to the circuit pack in slot 3, assign the other four voice
ports to a circuit pack in slot 7 or higher. See more about circuit pack
characteristics in the
DEFINITY ECS System Description
.
■Name — Assign the first port as AUDIX1, and then increment the number
for each subsequent port (AUDIX2, AUDIX3, and so on).
■COR — Use the same COR for the voice ports that you use for the hunt
groups. This COR should have the FRL set to 1 and should not allow
access to trunk group CORs.
■COS — Use a COS that allows data privacy.
add station 720 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 720 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: 2500 Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: COR: 35
Name: AUDIX1 Coverage Path 2: COS: 4
Hunt-to Station: Tests? n
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1 Message Waiting Indicator: none
Off Premise Station? n
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
184Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
The following is an example of Page 1 when Mode Code Integration is installed.
On Page 2:
■LWC Reception — Enter audix when using TCP/IP or X.25 signaling.
Enter none when using Mode Code integration.
■LWC Activation — Enter n when using TCP/IP or X.25 signaling. Enter
y when using Mode Code integration.
■Switchhook Flash — Enter y.
■Distinctive Audible Alerting — Enter n when using Mode Code
integration.
■Adjunct Supervision — Enter y if Message Manager is not being
used; enter n if Message Manager is being used. Enter y when using Mode
Code integration whether or not Message Manager is being used.
add station 720 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 720 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: VMI Security Code: TN: 1
Port: 01A0201 Coverage Path 1: COR: 35
Name: AUDIX1 Coverage Path 2: COS: 4
Hunt-to Station: Tests? n
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1
Off Premise Station? n
add station 720 Page 2 of 3
STATION
FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception: audix
LWC Activation? n Coverage Msg Retrieval? n
CDR Privacy? n Auto Answer: none
Redirect Notification? n Data Restriction? n
Per Button Ring Control? n Call Waiting Indication? n
Bridged Call Alerting? n Att. Call Waiting Indication? n
Switchhook Flash? y Distinctive Audible Alerting? n
Ignore Rotary Digits? n Adjunct Supervision? y
H.320 Conversion? n
Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number?
Audible Message Waiting? n
Coverage After Forwarding? s
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
185Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
On Page 3, set the Line Appearance field to call-appr.
After you assign the first port, use the duplicate station command to assign the
rest of the ports.
add station 720 Page 3 of 3
STATION
SITE DATA
Room: Headset? n
Jack: Speaker? n
Cable: Mounting: d
Floor: Cord Length: 0
Building: Set Color:
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: System 1 List2: List3:
HOT LINE DESTINATION
Abbreviated Dialing List Number (From above 1, 2 or 3):
Dial Code:
Line Appearance: call-appr
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
186Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Hunt Groups for INTUITY AUDIX
Voice Ports (Switch)
Use the add hunt-group command to administer the INTUITY AUDIX voice port
hunt groups. This hunt group is used by both the office staff and the hotel guests
when they call to retrieve their messages.
On Page 1:
■Group Name — Enter a name for this group.
■Group Extension — Enter an unassigned extension. This extension will
be used by office staff for message retrieval. The guests will use a different
extension that is forwarded into this hunt group. See page 188.
■Group Type — Enter ucd-mia.
■COR — Use the same COR as the INTUITY AUDIX voice ports.
■Queue — Enter y.
■Queue Length — This must equal the number of installed voice ports.
add hunt-group 1 Page 1 of 10
HUNT GROUP
Group Number: 1 ACD? n
Group Name: AUDIX Queue? y
Group Extension: 699 Vector? n
Group Type: ucd-mia Coverage Path:
TN: 1 Night Service Destination:
COR: 35 MM Early Answer? n
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Disp:
Queue Length: 6
Calls Warning Threshold: Port:
Time Warning Threshold: Port:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
187Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
On Page 2:
■Message Center — Enter audix if using TCP/IP or X.25 signaling. Enter
none if using Mode Code integration.
■Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX — Enter n except when
this feature is active on the INTUITY system.
■LWC Reception — Enter none.
On Page 3, assign each extension in the same order as assigned in the INTUITY
voice ports (page 190). The name field is populated after you add the list of
extensions and redisplay the hunt group. The Administered Members fields
should match the number of voice ports once all the voice ports have been
assigned.
add hunt-group 1 Page 2 of 10
HUNT GROUP
Message Center: audix
Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX? n
LWC Reception: none
First Announcement Extension: Delay (sec):
add hunt-group 1 Page 3 of 10
HUNT GROUP
Group Number: 1 Group Extension: 699 Group Type: ucd-mia
Member Range Allowed: 1 - 200 Administered Members (min/max): 1 /6
Total Administered Members: 6
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext Name Ext Name
1: 720 AUDIX1 14:
2: 721 AUDIX2 15:
3: 722 AUDIX3 16:
4: 723 AUDIX4 17:
5: 724 AUDIX5 18:
6: 725 AUDIX6 19:
7: 20:
8: 21:
9: 22:
10: 23:
11: 24:
12: 25:
13: 26:
At End of Member List
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
188Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Extensions for Guest Message Retrieval (Switch)
The way guests retrieve their messages is to call an extension that is call
forwarded to the INTUITY AUDIX hunt group extension. This is done using a
standard station line that covers to the hunt group (defined on page 186). You can
also assign an extension that allows guests to retrieve their messages when they
are not in their room, and an extension that allows guests to leave messages for
other guests without ringing the other guest’s room. See “Services to Phone
Number Mapping (INTUITY)” on page 192 for more information.
Use the add station command to add a station extension that is used only for
accessing the INTUITY AUDIX voice messages:
■Type — Enter 2500.
■Port — Enter X (administration without hardware).
■Name — Enter a name to identify this station.
■COS — Enter a COS designated for AUDIX use.
add station 710 Page 1 of 3
STATION
Extension: 710 Lock Messages? n BCC: 0
Type: 2500 Security Code: TN: 1
Port: X Coverage Path 1: COR: 35
Name: GUEST VOICE MAIL Coverage Path 2: COS: 4
Hunt-to Station: Tests? y
STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 1 Message Waiting Indicator:
Off Premise Station? n
add station 710 Page 2 of 3
STATION
FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception: audix
LWC Activation? n Coverage Msg Retrieval? n
CDR Privacy? n Auto Answer: none
Redirect Notification? n Data Restriction? n
Per Button Ring Control? n Call Waiting Indication? n
Bridged Call Alerting? n Att. Call Waiting Indication? n
Switchhook Flash? y Distinctive Audible Alerting? n
Ignore Rotary Digits? n Adjunct Supervision? y
H.320 Conversion? n
Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number? n
Audible Message Waiting? n
Coverage After Forwarding? s
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
189Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
On Page 3, set the Line Appearance field to call-appr.
After you assign the guest message retrieval extension, you must manually
assign Call Forwarding to this extension so that calls will forward to the main
INTUITY AUDIX hunt group extension. To use Call Forwarding, the Class of
Service for this station (the guest message retrieval extension) must have Call
Forwarding enabled (see page 89). In this example, you would forward calls
intended for extension 710 to extension 699. You can set up Call Forwarding from
any telephone that has console permissions.
Call Coverage Path (Switch)
Use the add coverage path command to define the coverage path that redirects
unanswered calls to the voice messaging system (as defined on page 186). After
three rings, calls go to hunt group 1 (h1). If the INTUITY system is down or the
voice ports are all busy, then the calls forward to the attendant (attd).
add station 710 Page 3 of 3
STATION
SITE DATA
Room: 710 Headset? n
Jack: Speaker? n
Cable: Mounting: d
Floor: Cord Length: 0
Building: Set Color:
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: System 1 List2: List3:
HOT LINE DESTINATION
Abbreviated Dialing List Number (From above 1, 2 or 3):
Dial Code:
Line Appearance: call-appr
add coverage path 1
COVERAGE PATH
Coverage Path Number: 1
Hunt after Coverage? n
Next Path Number: Linkage
COVERAGE CRITERIA
Station/Group Status Inside Call Outside Call
Active? y y
Busy? y y
Don’t Answer? y y Number of Rings: 3
All? n n
DND/SAC/Goto Cover? y y
COVERAGE POINTS
Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged Appearances? n
Point1: h1 Point2: attd Point3:
Point4: Point5: Point6:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
190Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
INTUITY AUDIX Voice Ports (INTUITY)
Do the following to assign the voice port extension numbers to each activated
voice channel on the INTUITY system:
NOTE:
Port numbers and channel numbers start with 0 (zero).
1. Enter the Voice System Administration > Voice Equipment command.
2. Press to display the actions menu.
3. Select the Assign/Change option.
4. Select the PBX Extension to Channel option.
5. Enter a voice port extension number and a channel number (0-5). Use the
same order here as was used when the hunt group extensions were
assigned (page 186).
6. Press to save the assignment. A message displays confirming that the
extension was mapped to a channel.
7. Press Enter to acknowledge the message.
8. Repeat this procedure for each voice port extension.
9. When finished, press to exit. You must now map services to channels
for normal operation.
10. Select the Services to Channels option.
11. Enter the numbers of the channels the customer has purchased in the
Channel Numbers field. For example, if the customer purchased 12
channels, enter 0-11.
12. Enter *DNIS_SVC for all channels in the Service Name field.
F8
+--------------------------------------------+
+ Assign PBX Extension to a Channel +
+--------------------------------------------+
| PBX Extension: |
| Channel Number: |
| |
+--------------------------------------------+
F3
F6
+--------------------------------------------+
+ Assign Services to Channels +
+--------------------------------------------+
| Channel Numbers: |
| Service Name: |
| |
+--------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
191Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
13. Press to save the assignment.
An acknowledgement message is displayed. Press to continue.
14. Press repeatedly to return to the INTUITY Main Menu.
15. Enter the Voice System Administration > Voice Equipment command to
display the voice channel setup.
The channel state should normally be Inserv (in-service), but it could be
foos (facility out-of-service) or manoos (manually out-of-service). The
SERVICE NAME should be *DNIS_SVC, and the GROUP should be set
to 2.
F3
F1
F6
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Display Voice Equipment +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| CD.PT CHN STATE STATE-CHNG-TIME SERVICE-NAME PHONE GROUP OPTS TYPE |
| |
| CARD 0 STATE: Inserv CLASS: Analog(TR) O.S. INDEX: 0 |
| NAME: AYC10 OPTIONS: master 1,no tdm,tt |
| FUNCTION: TipRing |
| |
| 0.0 0 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 720 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.1 1 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 721 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.2 2 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 722 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.3 3 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 723 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.4 4 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 724 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.5 5 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 725 2 talk IVC6 |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
192Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Services to Phone Number Mapping (INTUITY)
You must map the extension numbers used to retrieve and leave voice mail
messages to the services the extensions provide. These assignments control how
the call is processed by the INTUITY system. In the examples as shown in this
section, extension 699 is used by the office staff; extension 710 is used by the
guests from their guest rooms; and extension 770 is used for printing fax
messages.
!CAUTION:
If the AUDIX service is not assigned, calls placed to the office staff
extensions will hear an “Extension not valid” message when the call is
transferred to INTUITY AUDIX, and the caller cannot leave a message.
Use the Voice System Administration > Number Services > Assign Service
command to access the number service screen.
Assign Called Numbers and Calling Numbers to the following services:
■AUDIX — Enter the extension that the office staff call to retrieve their
AUDIX messages. In the example for this book, that would be
extension 699.
■AUDIX+ldg — Enter any.
■lodging — Enter the extension that guests call to retrieve their lodging
messages. In the example for this book, that would be extension 710.
■ldg_ni_vm — Enter an extension that guests can call to retrieve their
messages when away from their room. This extension should be assigned
to a DID number so guests can retrieve their messages when outside of
the hotel. This option is not available on all systems.
■ldg_ni_ca — Enter an extension that guests can call to leave a message
for another guest without ringing the other guest’s room. This extension
must have a coverage path that redirects to the voice mail extension and
should be call forwarded to the voice mail extension (in this example,
extension 699). This option is not available on all systems.
■LGfax — Enter the extension callers would use to transmit a fax. In the
example for this book, that would be extension 770.
The Calling Numbers fields will always be any. The example shown here
matches the extension used elsewhere in this book.
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+ Assign Number Service +
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
| Called Numbers:699 to 699 |
| Calling Numbers:any to any |
| Service Name:AUDIX |
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
193Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Attendant and Administrator Passwords
(INTUITY)
Use the Lodging Administration > Lodging Administrator Registration
command to access the administrator registration screen. Using this screen, you
must assign an administrator extension (an unused extension on the switch), an
administrator password, and an attendant password. These passwords can be
used to retrieve voice messages for the guests. Your administration should look
similar to this screen.
!CAUTION:
When creating passwords, do not use a sequential string of digits (such
as 1234) or a repeated digit (such as 5555).
+----------------------------------+
+Lodging Administrator Registration+
+----------------------------------+
|Administrator Extension: 475 |
| Administrator Password: 3872 |
| Attendant Password: 6391 |
+----------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
194Switch-to-INTUITY Translations
Testing the Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Ports
Use the Voice System Administration > Voice Equipment command to check
the status of the voice ports.
This command shows you the extension numbers directly assigned to each
INTUITY AUDIX voice port. You can call each extension to test the ports.
There are four possible port states:
— In-Service (Inserv) — The channel is ready to accept telephone
calls.
— Facility-out-of-service (Foos) — The channel is not in service. This
occurs when a channel has been released through the Voice Board
Diagnostics screen to Inserv, and it does not detect loop current. A
channel in the Foos state should automatically convert to the Inserv
state when it detects loop current, but it may need to be reset. If you
connected the ports to the switch and the ports remain in the Foos
state, there is a problem with the switch, the connection, or the
INTUITY hardware.
— Manually-out-of-service (Manoos) — The channel has been bus-
ied-out under the Voice Board Diagnostics screen, or the channel
is on a new tip/ring circuit card. A channel in the Manoos state will
remain until it is released under the Voice Board Diagnostics
screen.
— Non-Existent (NONEX or no entry on any screen) — The system
does not see the channel. The system will not see a channel that
has not been properly activated even if the tip/ring circuit card is
present. To change a channel from non-existent to recognized, the
remote maintenance center must activate it.
In this example, extension 725 is possibly out of service. It can be verified
by calling the port extension to see if the call is answered by INTUITY
AUDIX. Refer to the appropriate MAP installation document for more
information about testing.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Display Voice Equipment +
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| CD.PT CHN STATE STATE-CHNG-TIME SERVICE-NAME PHONE GROUP OPTS TYPE |
| |
| CARD 0 STATE: Inserv CLASS: Analog(TR) O.S. INDEX: 0 |
| NAME: AYC10 OPTIONS: master 1,no tdm,tt |
| FUNCTION: TipRing |
| |
| 0.0 0 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 720 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.1 1 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 721 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.2 2 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 722 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.3 3 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 723 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.4 4 Inserv Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 724 2 talk IVC6 |
| 0.5 5 Foos Mar 20 18:49:25 *DNIS_SVC 725 2 talk IVC6 |
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
195INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS
Translations
There are two ways that the INTUITY Lodging software and the PMS software
can exchange messages for database updates:
■Use the Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration feature. This feature uses
the switch to exchange the voice mail database update messages between
the INTUITY Lodging and the PMS. This option is known as the “PMS
Interface for GuestWorks.” The INTUITY system currently defaults to this
option. This option can be used with TCP/IP or X.25 links, but cannot be
used for Mode Code Integration.
■Use a hard-wired link between the MAP and the PMS voice messaging
port. This link is illustrated in Figure 10 on page 31. This option is known as
the “Stand-alone Mode.” This option can be used with TCP/IP or X.25 links,
and must be used for Mode Code Integration. This link should also be used
if the PMS must keep track of the number of voice mail messages for each
guest.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
196INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
PMS Interface for GuestWorks
To administer the PMS Interface for GuestWorks, you must do the following:
■Enable the feature on the switch
■Install the software on the INTUITY
■Set up the system parameters on the INTUITY.
To enable the Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration feature (the “PMS Interface
for GuestWorks” link), enter a y in the Forward PMS Messages to Intuity
Lodging field.
You must then verify whether the INTUITY system has the PMS Interface for
GuestWorks link software installed and active. Use the Software Management
screen to display or change the available options.
■If the “PMS Interface for GuestWorks” is currently installed, no changes are
needed.
■If the “Stand-Alone PMS Interface” is currently active or no interface has
been installed, install the “PMS Interface for GuestWorks” option. Follow
the instructions to install the software.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 1 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Message Waiting Configuration: act-nopms
Controlled Restrictions Configuration: act-pms
Housekeeper Information Configuration: act-pms
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits: 0
PMS Log Endpoint:
Journal/Schedule Endpoint:
Client Room Coverage Path Configuration: act-nopms
Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms: 1
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging? y
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
PMS Endpoint: 7899
PMS Protocol Mode: transparent ASCII mode? y
Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout: 20
Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement Timeout: 500
PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions: 5
PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests: 5
Take Down Link for Lost Messages? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
197INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
Once the software is installed, use the Lodging Administration > System
Parameter Administration command to administer the system parameters for
INTUITY Lodging.
■Attendant Extensions — Enter 0 for the attendant console, the
backup telephone extensions, and any extensions that will be used to
retrieve messages for guests.
■Primary Attendant — Enter the attendant console dial-up number
(usually 0) or extension.
■Default Language — Select a default language option.
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ System Parameter Administration +
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Attendant Extensions: |
| 2000 195 0 |
| Hunt Group Or |
| Primary Attendant: 0 |
| |
| Voice Mail Parameters |
| Mailbox Size: 6 min Mailbox Type: Separate |
| Pause For TT Input: 4 sec Play Back Format: FIFO |
| Maximum Extension Length: 4 |
| Maximum Message Length: 120 sec |
|Allow Guests To Save Messages?: Yes |
|Lamp ON For New Messages Only?: Yes |
| Automatic Transfer to |
| Operator At End Of Call?: No |
| Default Language: American English |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
198INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
Stand-Alone Interface Link
To administer the stand-alone interface link, do the following:
■Disable the integrated link feature on the switch
■Install the software on the INTUITY
■Set up the link on the INTUITY
■Set up the system parameters on the INTUITY.
To use the hard-wired link between the INTUITY and the PMS (Figure 10), you
must first disable the Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration feature. Enter an n in
the Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging field.
Then, verify whether the INTUITY system has the Stand-Alone Mode link software
installed and active. Use the Software Management screen to display or change
the available options.
■If the “Stand-Alone PMS Interface” is currently installed, no changes are
needed.
■If the “PMS Interface for GuestWorks” is currently active or no interface has
been installed, install the “Stand-alone PMS Interface” option. Follow the
instructions to install the software.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 1 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Message Waiting Configuration: act-nopms
Controlled Restrictions Configuration: act-pms
Housekeeper Information Configuration: act-pms
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits: 0
PMS Log Endpoint:
Journal/Schedule Endpoint:
Client Room Coverage Path Configuration: act-nopms
Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms: 1
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging? n
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
PMS Endpoint: 7899
PMS Protocol Mode: transparent ASCII mode? y
Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout: 20
Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement Timeout: 500
PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions: 5
PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests: 5
Take Down Link for Lost Messages? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
199INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
Once the software is installed, use this screen on the INTUITY to administer the
standard hard-wired link between the INTUITY Lodging and the PMS. Use the
Lodging Administration > PMS Parameter Administration command to
access this screen.
■Device for Link — This must match the physical port connected to the
Equinox card. Use /dev/ttysac if the connection is on the Multi-Port Serial
Card, and use /dev/ttys00 if the connection is on the COM1 port.
■Baud Rate — Set the speed to match the vendor equipment. If the vendor
does not have a recommended speed, use 4800 bps. You must enter the
letter B in front of the baud rate you select.
■All other options must match the vendor requirements.
Use the Lodging Administration > System Parameter Administration
command to administer the system parameters for INTUITY Lodging.
■Attendant Extensions — Enter 0 for the attendant console, the
backup telephone extensions, and any extensions that will be used to
retrieve messages for guests.
■Primary Attendant — Enter the attendant console dial-up number
(usually 0) or extension.
■Lamp ON For New Messages Only — Enter Yes if using TCP/IP or
X.25 signaling between the switch and the INTUITY system. Enter No if
using Mode Code integration between the switch and the INTUITY system.
■Default Language — Select the default language option.
■PMS Integration Parameters — Must match the vendor
requirements.
+-----------------------------------------------+
+ PMS Parameter Administration +
+-----------------------------------------------+
| Device for Link: /dev/ttysac |
| Maximum Link Error: 50 |
| Link Acknowledgement Timeout: 20 sec |
| Link Idle Timeout: 20 sec |
| Maximum Retransmission: 5 |
|Maximum Retransmission Request: 5 |
| Baud Rate: B4800 |
+-----------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
200INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
■Message Lamp Controlled By — This should be set to LDG if you
want INTUITY Lodging to control the guest room message lamps. If the
lamp control is enabled for the PMS, the front desk personnel should take
messages for guests when the PMS link is down because the message
lamps will not be turned on even when the INTUITY has taken a message.
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ System Parameter Administration +
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Attendant Extensions: |
| 2000 195 0 |
| Hunt Group Or |
| Primary Attendant: 0 |
| |
| Voice Mail Parameters |
| Mailbox Size: 6 min Mailbox Type: Separate |
| Pause For TT Input: 4 sec Play Back Format: FIFO |
| Maximum Extension Length: 4 |
| Maximum Message Length: 120 sec |
|Allow Guests To Save Messages?: Yes PMS Integration Parameters |
|Lamp ON For New Messages Only?: Yes Message Lamp Controlled By: LDG |
| Automatic Transfer to When PMS link is down, calls |
| Operator At End Of Call?: No For Guests Handled By: LDG |
| Default Language: American English |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
201INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
Testing the INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link
After the connection is complete, and the link is active, the mini-tester should
show the following results (see the Note on page 5). The leads marked with an
asterisk are controlled by the INTUITY system, and the PMS controls the other
leads.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
After the connection is complete and the INTUITY link is active, the following may
indicate that the PMS is not active. Check with the vendor to verify whether the
link is active.
TD*
RTS*
DTR*
RD
CTS
DSR
CD
green
green
red
green
red
dark
green
TD*
RTS*
DTR*
RD
CTS
DSR
CD
red
red
red
red
red
dark
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
202INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
Table 12 gives a list of PMS alarm codes, the event IDs, a description of the
problem, and a method to clear the problem. Use the Customer/Services
Administration > Log Administration > Maintenance Log command to set up
which maintenance events will display.
Table 12. PMS Event IDs Generated on the INTUITY
Alarm
Code Event IDs Description Clearing
11 PMS01, PMS02,
PMS04, PMS05,
PMS06, PMS07
The PMS communication
link is down. Restart PMS through
the command menu.
12 PMS08 An unknown PMS commu-
nication link problem. Stop and restart the
voice system.
13 PMS10, PMS11, PMS38 Unable to manage allo-
cated memory. Stop and restart the
voice system.
14 PMS14 PMS received a message
of an invalid size. Stop and restart the
voice system.
15 PMS03, PMS09,
PMS12, PMS13,
PMS15, PMS16,
PMS27, PMS29,
PMS30, PMS31,
PMS33, PMS34,
PMS35, PMS39, PMS43
The PMS communication
interface is having prob-
lems.
Restart PMS through
the command menu.
16 PMS20, PMS22,
PMS24, PMS25 Unable to use the
assigned serial port. Stop and restart the
voice system.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
203INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
Use the following procedure to test the voice mailboxes for the guest rooms:
NOTE:
When using TCP/IP or X.25 signaling, mailboxes are created automatically
for the guest rooms and do not require administration. When using Mode
Code integration, guest mailboxes must be created manually. See
“Mailboxes for Guest Rooms (INTUITY)” on page 132 for more information.
1. Do a test check-in from the PMS terminal to create a valid entry. Access
the following screen using the Lodging Administration > Guests Mailbox
Administration > Mailbox command.
2. Press to change the function key labels.
3. Enter the extension number, and press the DISPLAY function key.
+-------------------------------------------------------+
+ Mailbox +
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| Guest Extension: 112 |
| Guest Room Number: 112 |
| Guest Name: ERWIN |
| Guest Password: * |
| Guest Language: Canadian French |
| Switch number: 1 |
|Allow personal greeting: Yes |
| |
| Messages Waiting: |
| Voice: |
| Fax: |
| Text: |
| Mailbox Capacity Usage: 0% |
|Suite Mailbox Extension: |
| Comments: |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
F8
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
204INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Translations
4. Display the following screen using the Lodging Administration > Traffic
and Space Usage Reports > Mailbox Usage command to verify that the
test mailbox was created.
5. After you verify that the guest mailbox was created, remove the test entry
by doing a check-out at the PMS terminal.
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ Mailbox Usage Report +
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Mailbox Usage Report |
| Mailbox size: 360 seconds |
| Mon Apr 1 07:40:20 1996 |
| Current Messages: |
| Mailbox Voice Msgs Time(secs) Text Msgs Fax Msgs |
| 112 0 0 0 0 |
| 115 0 0 0 0 |
| 119 0 0 0 0 |
| 123 0 0 0 0 |
| |
| Deleted Messages: |
| Mailbox Voice Msgs Time(secs) |
| 115 4 230 |
| |
| Old Messages: |
| Mailbox Voice Msgs Time(secs) |
| 112 0 0 |
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
205Switch-to-Call Accounting Translations
Switch-to-Call Accounting
Translations
You must assign the link between the switch and the INTUITY, administer the
CDR parameters, and enable CDR for each incoming and outgoing trunk group
that the customer wishes to record. If a stand-alone call accounting system (such
as Xiox) is used, the vendor must assist in setting up the call accounting system.
Link Parameters (INTUITY)
The data link between the switch and the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting must
be administered by the Homisco technician when he or she installs the software
on the INTUITY platform.
CDR Parameters (Switch)
Use the change system-parameters cdr command to assign the CDR
parameters on the switch.
■Primary Output Format — Enter printer (or the format required by the
call accounting vendor).
■Primary Output Endpoint — Do one of the following:
— Enter eia if the call accounting system is directly connected to the
switch using the DCE port.
— Enter the data module extension if using a switched connection. A
data module must be administered first before making this assign-
ment.
■EIA Device Bit Rate — If the output endpoint is set to eia, use the
default of 9600 for the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting system, and 1200
for the Xiox call accounting system. For other stand-alone call accounting
systems, use the speed specified by the vendor.
■Record Outgoing Calls Only — Unless the customer wishes to
record incoming calls, enter y.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
206Switch-to-Call Accounting Translations
■CDR Account Code Length — When setting up billing for forwarding
faxes (see “Billing Considerations When Forwarding Faxes” on page 102),
set this field to the number of digits used for extensions in the dial plan.
As shown on page 142, enable CDR Reports for each trunk group.
Testing the Switch-to-Call Accounting Link
To test the CDR link, use the status cdr-link command on the switch.
You should also work with the vendor to test the link from the call accounting end.
If you are installing the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting, work with the Homisco
technician to test the link.
change system-parameters cdr Page 1 of 1
CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Node Number (Local PBX ID): CDR Date Format: month/day
Primary Output Format: printer Primary Output Endpoint: eia
Secondary Output Format:
Use ISDN Layouts? n EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600
Use Enhanced Formats? n Condition Code ‘T’ for Redirected Calls? n
Modified Circuit ID Display? n Remove # From Called Number? n
Record Outgoing Calls Only? y Intra-switch CDR? n
Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? y CDR Call Splitting? y
Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? n Attendant Call Recording? y
Interworking Feat-flag? n
Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form? n
Calls to Hunt Group - Record: member-ext
Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? n
Inc Trk Call Splitting? n
Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? n
Record Call-Assoc TSC? n Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: dialed
Privacy - Digits to Hide: 0 CDR Account Code Length: 4
status cdr-link
CDR LINK STATUS
Primary Secondary
Link State: up extension not administered
Maintenance Busy? no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
207INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS Translations
INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting-to-PMS Translations
The data link between the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting and the PMS must
be administered by the Homisco technician when he or she installs the software
on the INTUITY platform.
If a stand-alone call accounting system (such as Xiox) is used, the vendor must
assist in setting up the call accounting system.
Testing the INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting-to-PMS Link
To test the call accounting link, make a test call from a test guest room to verify
that the call is posted on the call accounting system and the PMS.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
208Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Administration of the switch-to-PMS link includes the following:
■Hospitality parameters (page 208)
■DCP link using the network control (netcon) data module for
si
system
(page 212) and a processor data module on all systems (page 213)
■Housekeeping status feature access codes and definitions (page 213)
■Controlled restrictions (page 215).
Hospitality Parameters
Use the change system-parameters hospitality command to administer the
hospitality parameters for the PMS. These assignments must be coordinated with
the PMS vendor and the customer. On Page 1, administer the following:
■For the Message Waiting Configuration field, enter act-nopms if
the INTUITY is controlling the message waiting lamps, and enter act-pms
if the PMS is controlling the message waiting lamps. If the PMS supports
text messaging, enter act-pms. If all messaging is handled on the INTUITY
system, enter act-nopms.
■The Controlled Restrictions Configuration, Housekeeper
Information Configuration, and Client Room Coverage Path
Configuration fields control features offered by some PMS vendors. If
the PMS vendor supports the feature, enter act-pms in the corresponding
field. If the PMS vendor does not support the feature, enter act-nopms in
the corresponding field. Note that if the Client Room Coverage Path
Configuration field is administered incorrectly, administered coverage
paths for rooms will be deleted.
■In the PMS Endpoint field, enter the extension number of the PMS data
module for a DCP link.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
209Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
■If the PMS Protocol Mode is transparent (also known as
Names
protocol), set the Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout to 20
and the Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement
Timeout to 500.
If the PMS Protocol Mode is normal, set the Seconds before PMS
Link Idle Timeout to 20 and the Milliseconds before PMS Link
Acknowledgement Timeout to 300.
If the PMS supports the ASCII data mode, enter a y in the ASCII mode
field, set the Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout to 20, and
the Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement Timeout
to 500.
■The PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions field indicates the
number of times that the switch will retransmit a message to the PMS in
response to a negative acknowledgment or send an inquiry for
acknowledgment from the PMS before giving up on the message. Valid
entries are 1 to 5.
■The PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests field indicates
the number of times that the switch will allow the PMS to request
acknowledgment for a message that it sent. Valid entries are 1 to 5.
■The Take Down Link for Lost Messages field indicates whether
the link will be taken down if messages are being lost. If set to n, you
should monitor the PMS error log to see if the link is operating correctly.
NOTE:
Use the commands busyout pms-link followed by release pms-link
whenever you change the link timer values.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 1 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Message Waiting Configuration: act-nopms
Controlled Restrictions Configuration: act-pms
Housekeeper Information Configuration: act-pms
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits: 0
PMS Log Endpoint:
Journal/Schedule Endpoint:
Client Room Coverage Path Configuration: act-nopms
Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms: 1
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging? y
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
PMS Endpoint: 7899
PMS Protocol Mode: transparent ASCII mode? y
Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout: 20
Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement Timeout: 500
PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions: 5
PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests: 5
Take Down Link for Lost Messages? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
210Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
On Page 2, administer the following:
■The Number of Digits From PMS field should be left blank, and the
Digit to Insert/Delete field may need to be administered. If the
room numbers use a combination of 3- and 4-digit or 4- and 5-digit
extension numbers, you must enter the leading digit that must be inserted
when sent from the PMS to the switch and that must be deleted when sent
from the switch to the PMS.
NOTE:
The PMS interface supports 3-, 4-, or 5-digit extensions, but be
aware that prefixed extensions do not send the entire number
across the interface. Only the assigned extension number is
sent. Therefore, you should not use prefixed extensions for
numbers that are also going to use the Insert/Delete Digit
function.
This works as shown in the following example:
— Digit Insertion — If the digits received by the switch are 123, and the
insertion digit is 7, extension 7123 is checked to see if it is a valid
extension. If 7123 is valid, the message is processed for
extension 7123; if extension 7123 is not valid, the switch assumes
that the message is for extension 123 and processes it accordingly.
If both 7123 and 123 are valid, the message will only be processed
for extension 7123. Numbering conflicts such as this should be
avoided when possible.
— Digit Deletion — The switch checks the extension number before
the number is sent to the PMS. If the extension number contains the
maximum number of digits translated for a leading digit, and the
leading digit matches the administered Insert/Delete digit, the digit is
deleted before sending the extension to the PMS.
For example, if the Insert/Delete digit is 7, and extensions 712
and 7123 are valid on the switch, 712 will be sent as 712;
however, 7123 is sent as 123. This example presumes that there
are no 5-digit extensions starting with 7 on the switch.
■The PMS Sends Prefix field indicates whether the PMS sends a prefix
digit to the switch as part of the room numbering plan.
NOTE:
If the PMS Sends Prefix field is set to n, and the Number
of Digits from PMS field is blank, the switch will not
support an extension that starts with 0.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
211Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
■The Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path field indicates
whether the coverage paths are 3 or 4 digits long.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Dual Wakeups? y Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? y
VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes: 5
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? y
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report:
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report:
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report:
Announcement Type: mult-integ
Default Announcement Extension: 380
Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement: 30
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: 399
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis:
Display Room Information in Call Display? n
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers? y
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers? y
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix? n
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path: 3
Digit to Insert/Delete:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
212Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Link Connectivity Administration
To administer the switch-to-PMS link using a DCP data module, do the following:
■Administer the netcon data module (si systems only).
■Administer a processor data module (all systems).
Network Control (Netcon) Data Module
Use the add data-module command to administer the netcon data module on the
si
system.
You should assign all four netcon channels. The following table is an example of
how you can administer the netcon channels:
Data
Extension
Physical
Channel
Maintenance
Extension
7891 01 7895
7892 02 7896
7893 03 7897
7894 04 7898
add data-module 7891
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 7891 Name: NETCON 01 BCC: 2
Type: netcon COS: 15 Maintenance Extension: 7995
Physical Channel: 01 COR: 50
ITC: restricted TN: 1
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1:
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION:
ASSIGNED MEMBER ( Station with a data extension button for this data module )
Ext Name
1:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
213Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Data Modules
Use the add data-module command to administer the data module connected
between the switch and the PMS.
Housekeeping Status
Use the change feature-access-codes command to assign the housekeeping
status feature access codes. Administer only the feature access codes that the
vendor supports and that match the status definitions.
add data-module 7899
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 7899 Name: PMS LINK BCC: 2
Type: pdm COS: 1 Remote Loop-Around Test? n
Port: 01B0102 COR: 50 Secondary data module? n
ITC: restricted TN: 1 Connected to: dte
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1:
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION:
ASSIGNED MEMBER ( Station with a data extension button for this data module )
Ext Name
1:
change feature-access-codes Page 5 of 5
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Hospitality Features
Automatic Wakeup Call Access Code: *98
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code: *81
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code: *82
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code: *83
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code: *84
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code:
Verify Wakeup Announcement Access Code: *89
Voice Do Not Disturb Access Code: *33
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
214Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Use the change system-parameters hospitality command to define whether the
housekeeping staff will use IDs, and to administer the housekeeping status
definitions.
On Page 1, the Number of Housekeeper ID Digits field determines the
length of the housekeeping staff ID numbers. Valid entries are 0 to 6. If set to 0,
housekeeping IDs are not used.
On Page 2, enter the definitions for each room state. The status for each of these
must be coordinated with what is administered in the PMS.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 1 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Message Waiting Configuration: act-nopms
Controlled Restrictions Configuration: act-pms
Housekeeper Information Configuration: act-pms
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits: 0
PMS Log Endpoint:
Journal/Schedule Endpoint:
Client Room Coverage Path Configuration: act-nopms
Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms: 1
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging? y
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
PMS Endpoint: 7899
PMS Protocol Mode: transparent ASCII mode? y
Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout: 20
Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement Timeout: 500
PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions: 5
PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests: 5
Take Down Link for Lost Messages? y
change system-parameters hospitality Page 3 of 3
HOSPITALITY
ROOM STATES
Definition for Rooms in State 1: Occupied/dirty
Definition for Rooms in State 2: Occupied/maid In Room
Definition for Rooms in State 3: Occupied/clean
Definition for Rooms in State 4: Vacant/clean
Definition for Rooms in State 5:
Definition for Rooms in State 6:
HOSPITALITY FEATURES
Suite Check-in? y
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
215Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Controlled Restrictions
When Controlled Restrictions are applied to guest rooms, calls made to those
rooms or from those rooms are routed to intercept treatment. The recommended
intercept treatment is shown in the following example. Use the change
system-parameters features command to set the controlled restriction intercept
treatment.
The PMS automatically applies controlled restrictions to guest rooms as guests
check in and check out. If the PMS link is down, you will have to apply and remove
controlled restrictions manually. Administer the controlled restriction feature
access codes using the screens beginning on page 86. You can also assign
feature buttons on the attendant console for the Controlled Restrictions feature.
See “Attendant Console Button Layouts (Switch)” on page 106 for more
information.
Optionally, customers can substitute Toll Restriction for the standard Outward or
Station-to-Station restrictions. Using the Controlled Toll Restriction
replaces field, you can enter none, outward, or station-station. If you enter
none, the customer has access to Outward, Total, Termination, and Station-to-
Station restrictions. If you enter outward, the customer has access to Toll, Total,
Termination, and Station-to-Station restrictions. If you enter station-station, the
customer has access to Outward, Total, Termination, and Toll restrictions. In this
example, Toll Restriction is substituted for Station-Station Restriction.
Instruct customers to use the
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Hospitality
Operations
document to learn more about Controlled Restrictions and how to use
them.
change system-parameters features Page 3 of 10
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue: 5
Time before Off-hook Alert: 10
Emergency Access Redirection Extension:
Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue: 5
Call Pickup Alerting? n
Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup? y
Call Pickup on Intercom Calls? y
Directed Call Pickup? n
Extended Group Call Pickup: none
Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to Originator? y
Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment: attendant
Controlled Termination Restriction (Do Not Disturb): coverage
Controlled Station to Station Restriction: attendant
AUTHORIZATION CODE PARAMETERS Authorization Codes Enabled? y
Authorization Code Length: 7
Authorization Code Cancellation Symbol: #
Attendant Time Out Flag? n
Display Authorization Code? y
Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces: station-station
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
216Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Testing the Switch-to-PMS Link
To test the switch-to-PMS link, have the hotel designate a room for testing. Testing
the switch-to-PMS link includes the following:
■Link testing with the RS232 mini-tester (page 217)
■Netcon and data module testing (page 219)
■PMS testing and status (page 220)
■Database swap testing (page 221)
■Check-in and check-out testing (page 222)
■Message waiting testing (both manual messages and voice messages)
(page 223)
■Controlled restrictions testing (page 226)
■Housekeeping status testing (page 227).
During the switch-to-PMS testing, you will use the list pms-down command often
to view events that may indicate problems with the link. These events are found in
“Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
217Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Switch-to-PMS Link Testing with the
RS232 Mini-Tester
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the
PMS link. The leads marked with an asterisk are controlled by the switch, and the
PMS controls the other leads. If any switch leads are dark, there is no connection.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
If the link to a PMS is active, the mini-tester should show the following. The
Physical Link State should be up, and the Protocol State should be up. If this is
the status of the link, proceed to “Netcon and Data Module Testing” on page 219.
Otherwise, look at the other results in this section.
If the link is idle, the mini-tester may show the following. The Physical Link State
will be down, and the Protocol State will be down. Possible causes may be that
the switch or PMS are not administered correctly, or the PMS software is not
running.
NOTE:
The CTS lead shows green when used with an 8400B. RTS will be lit on the
front panel of the 7400A and 7400B.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
green
green
red
green
red
green
green
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
red
red
red
red
red
red
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
218Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
If the link to a PMS is idle, the mini-tester may also show the following. The
Physical Link State will be down, and the Protocol State will be down. Possible
causes may be that the PMS hardware is powered-up, but the switch is not
administered correctly, or the PMS link is busied out at the switch.
NOTE:
The CTS lead shows green when used with an 8400B. RTS will be lit on the
front panel of the 7400A or 7400B.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
red
red
red
red
green
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
219Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Netcon and Data Module Testing
If the switch-to-PMS link uses TCP/IP, skip this test. To test the netcon and the
data modules for a DCP link, do the following:
1. Use the status data-module XXXX command (where XXXX is the
extension of the netcon data module).
If the status message shows that the netcon data module is in the in-
service/active state and shows the connected port of the actual data
module, this indicates that there was an available netcon data channel and
that the data module extension has been added to the hospitality
parameters screen.
If the status message shows that the netcon data module is in the in-
service/idle state, the PMS link may have been busied out. Release the
PMS link.
2. Use the status data-module XXXX command (where XXXX is the
extension of the PMS link data module).
If the status message shows that the PMS link data module is in the in-
service/active state and shows the connected port of the netcon, this
indicates that the PMS link data module extension has been added to the
hospitality parameters screen.
If the status message shows that the netcon data module is in the in-
service/idle state, the PMS link may not be providing DTR. Contact the
PMS vendor for assistance.
3. Dial the netcon extension and the PMS link data module extension. If these
facilities are operational, you will hear a high-pitched data tone.
status data-module 7891
DATA-MODULE STATUS
Data Ext/Stn Ext for Stn DM: 7891 Service State: in-service/active
Port/Channel Number: 01A0502 Maintenance Busy? no
CF Destination Ext:
Connected Ports: 01AXX01
status data-module 7899
DATA-MODULE STATUS
Data Ext/Stn Ext for Stn DM: 7899 Service State: in-service/active
Port/Channel Number: 01AXX01 Maintenance Busy? no
CF Destination Ext:
Connected Ports: 01A0502
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
220Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
PMS Testing and Status
Use the test pms command to test the PMS link. If the link is not active, this
command sometimes causes the link to be established. The PMS test (Test 215)
must pass before you proceed with further testing.
Use the status pms-link command to display the current status of the PMS link.
The following is an example of that screen:
The fields are defined as follows:
■Physical Link State — If the link state is Up, the transmit/receive
lamps will be flashing, and all lamps except for the ringing indicator lamp
will be lit. This indicates that the link is active, and the call has been placed
from the netcon to the data module.
■Protocol State — If the protocol state is Up, the data module carrier
detect lamp is lit, and at least one status inquiry message has been
received and understood from the PMS. The data module transmit/receive
lamps will be flashing if the switch is talking with the PMS. If the lamps stay
on longer than the link idle timeout setting (usually 20 seconds), the switch
and the PMS are communicating. If the TD lamp flashes every 15 to 20
seconds, this indicates that the PMS is sending data to the switch.
■Number of Retries — This count increments every 5 minutes for the
first 12 retries, and then every 15 minutes until the link is established. A
high number of retries could indicate that the netcon data channel is not
available because too many resources are assigned, or the data module
could be busy. If there are no retries to report, this field is not displayed.
■Maintenance Busy? — This field shows whether the link is currently
maintenance busied-out. If the link is not maintenance busied-out, this field
is not displayed.
■Database Swapping? — If the field displays yes, the room images are
being transmitted between the switch and the PMS. If the field displays
pending, the database swap has been requested by the switch. If the field
displays no, the PMS link is up.
status pms-link
PMS LINK STATUS
Physical Link State: Down
Protocol State: Down
Maintenance Busy? No
Database Swapping? No
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
221Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Database Swap Testing
To test database swapping, do the following:
1. Busy-out the PMS link using the busyout pms-link command.
2. Do a check-in or check-out on the test room from the attendant console or
backup telephone. This sets the flag for the switch to request a database
swap from the PMS.
3. Release the PMS link using the release pms-link command.
4. Use the status pms-link command to verify the database swap between
the switch and the PMS. A database swap can take from 20 minutes to 1
hour. If the database swap completes immediately, the PMS may only be
set up for an “empty swap” as opposed to a full swap. Contact the PMS
vendor and request that the vendor change the system setup to do a full
swap when one is requested by the switch.
NOTE:
Before the database swapping begins, the Database
Swapping field may show Pending.
5. When the database swapping is complete, the Database Swapping field
displays No. Use the status station XXXX command (where XXXX is a
guest room number) on a few guest rooms to confirm that the check-in and
check-out status agrees between the switch and the PMS.
6. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
status pms-link
PMS LINK STATUS
Physical Link State: Up
Protocol State: Up
Database Swapping? Yes
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
222Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Check-In and Check-Out Testing
To test check-in and check-out, do the following:
1. Do a check-in for the test room from the PMS terminal.
2. Use the status station XXXX command (where XXXX is the test room
number). The status should appear as follows:
At check-in, the Room Status field displays occupied, and the User
Cntrl Restr field displays none. If an occupied room’s restriction is set
to outward, this indicates that the guest is a cash-paying customer and is
restricted from placing calls external to the switch.
3. Use the list station command to list the guest room stations. The test
room guest name, as well as other guest names received on a database
swap, should display on that listing.
4. Use the list maintenance pms-down command to display any PMS
messages that may help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of
the PMS messages are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events”
on page 245.
5. Do a check-out on the test room.
6. Run the status station XXXX command again.
The Room Status field should be vacant, and the restrictions should be
set to outward.
7. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
status station 1005 Page 1 of 1
GENERAL STATUS
Type: 2500 Service State: in-srv/on-hook or disc
Extension: 1005 Download Status: not-applicable
Port: 01B0601 SAC Activated? no
Call Parked? no User Cntrl Restr: none
Ring Cut Off Act? No Group Cntrl Restr: none
Active Coverage Option: 1 CF Destination Ext:
Message Waiting:
Connected Ports:
ACD STATUS HOSPITALITY STATUS
Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod AWU Call At:
/ / / / / User DND: not activated
/ / / / / Group DND: not activated
/////Room Status: occupied
/////
On ACD Call? no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
223Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Message Waiting Testing
You must test manual message waiting and voice messaging (if installed). To test
manual message waiting, do the following:
1. From the PMS terminal, activate manual message waiting for the test
room.
2. Use the status station XXXX command (where XXXX is the test room
number). The status should appear as follows:
3. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
4. Deliver the message from the PMS terminal.
5. Run the status station XXXX command again.
The Message Waiting field should be blank.
6. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
status station 1005
GENERAL STATUS
Type: 2500 Service State: in-srv/on-hook or disc
Extension: 1005 Download Status: not-applicable
Port: 01B0601 SAC Activated? no
Call Parked? no User Cntrl Restr: none
Ring Cut Off Act? No Group Cntrl Restr: none
Active Coverage Option: 1 CF Destination Ext:
Message Waiting: pms
Connected Ports:
ACD STATUS HOSPITALITY STATUS
Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod AWU Call At:
/ / / / / User DND: not activated
/ / / / / Group DND: not activated
/ / / / / Room Status: occupied
/////
On ACD Call? no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
224Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
To test voice messaging by retrieving the message from the test room, do the
following:
1. Call the test room.
2. Leave a message after the greeting and tone.
3. Use the status station XXXX command (where XXXX is the test room
number). The status should appear as follows:
4. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
5. From the test room, call the voice messaging system. You will hear
“Welcome to the guest voice mail system. You have one new message.”
Listen to the message, and then delete the message.
6. Run the status station XXXX command again.
The Message Waiting field should be blank.
7. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
status station 1005
GENERAL STATUS
Type: 2500 Service State: in-srv/on-hook or disc
Extension: 1005 Download Status: not-applicable
Port: 01B0601 SAC Activated? no
Call Parked? no User Cntrl Restr: none
Ring Cut Off Act? No Group Cntrl Restr: none
Active Coverage Option: 1 CF Destination Ext:
Message Waiting: audix
Connected Ports:
ACD STATUS HOSPITALITY STATUS
Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod AWU Call At:
/ / / / / User DND: not activated
/ / / / / Group DND: not activated
/ / / / / Room Status: occupied
/////
On ACD Call? no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
225Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
To test voice messaging by retrieving the message from the attendant console, do
the following:
1. Call the test room.
2. Leave another message after the greeting and tone.
3. Use the status station XXXX command (where XXXX is the test room
number). The status should appear as follows:
4. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
5. From the attendant console or backup telephone, call the voice messaging
system. You will hear “Please enter your room extension.” Enter the test
room extension. You will hear “You have one new voice mail message.”
Listen to the message, and then delete the message.
6. Run the status station XXXX command again.
The Message Waiting field should be blank.
7. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
status station 1005
GENERAL STATUS
Type: 2500 Service State: in-srv/on-hook or disc
Extension: 1005 Download Status: not-applicable
Port: 01B0601 SAC Activated? no
Call Parked? no User Cntrl Restr: none
Ring Cut Off Act? No Group Cntrl Restr: none
Active Coverage Option: 1 CF Destination Ext:
Message Waiting: audix
Connected Ports:
ACD STATUS HOSPITALITY STATUS
Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod AWU Call At:
/ / / / / User DND: not activated
/ / / / / Group DND: not activated
/ / / / / Room Status: occupied
/////
On ACD Call? no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
226Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Controlled Restrictions Testing
To test Controlled Restrictions, do the following:
1. From the PMS terminal, activate Outward Restriction on the test room.
2. Use the status station XXXX command (where XXXX is the test room
number). The status should appear as follows:
3. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
4. From the PMS terminal, deactivate Outward Restriction on the test room.
5. Run the status station XXXX command again.
The User Cntrl Restr field should be blank.
6. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
status station 1005
GENERAL STATUS
Type: 2500 Service State: in-srv/on-hook or disc
Extension: 1005 Download Status: not-applicable
Port: 01B0601 SAC Activated? no
Call Parked? no User Cntrl Restr: outward
Ring Cut Off Act? No Group Cntrl Restr: none
Active Coverage Option: 1 CF Destination Ext:
Message Waiting:
Connected Ports:
ACD STATUS HOSPITALITY STATUS
Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod Grp/Mod AWU Call At:
/ / / / / User DND: not activated
/ / / / / Group DND: not activated
/ / / / / Room Status: occupied
/////
On ACD Call? no
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
227Switch-to-PMS Link Translations
Housekeeping Status Testing
To verify that the housekeeping status is updated, do the following:
1. Using a telephone in the test room, update the housekeeping status. If the
PMS confirms the status change within 4 seconds, you will hear
confirmation tone. If the status was not accepted, you will hear reorder
tone. If you dialed an invalid code, you will hear intercept tone.
2. Verify that the status changed at the PMS terminal. You can also check the
housekeeping status from the attendant console.
3. Use the list pms-down command to display any PMS messages that may
help you troubleshoot link problems. The meanings of the PMS messages
are found in “Appendix C — List PMS Down Events” on page 245.
4. At a telephone designated for housekeeping updates, update the
housekeeping status for the test room. If the PMS confirms the status
change within 4 seconds, you will hear confirmation tone. If the status was
not accepted, you will hear reorder tone. If you dialed an invalid code, you
will hear intercept tone.
5. Verify that the status changed at the PMS terminal. You can also check the
housekeeping status from the attendant console.
Provide a list of feature access codes and housekeeping status codes to the
customer and the PMS vendor.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
228Printer Translations (Switch)
Printer Translations (Switch)
To translate a printer, do the following:
■Administer the printer data module extension number.
■Administer the time when scheduled reports will print.
■Administer the data module.
Enter a the data module extensions of the printers in the PMS Log Endpoint
and Journal/Schedule Endpoint field.
For a system printer, enter the data module extension in the System Printer
Endpoint field. If you are connecting the system printer to the DCE EIA port
(instead of using that port for call accounting), enter eia in this field.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 1 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Message Waiting Configuration: act-nopms
Controlled Restrictions Configuration: act-pms
Housekeeper Information Configuration: act-pms
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits: 0
PMS Log Endpoint: 7850
Journal/Schedule Endpoint: 7850
Client Room Coverage Path Configuration: act-nopms
Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms: 1
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging? y
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
PMS Endpoint: 7899
PMS Protocol Mode: transparent ASCII mode? y
Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout: 20
Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgement Timeout: 500
PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions: 5
PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests: 5
Take Down Link for Lost Messages? y
change system-parameters features Page 4 of 10
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SYSTEM PRINTER PARAMETERS
System Printer Endpoint: 7860 Lines Per Page: 60
EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600
SYSTEM-WIDE PARAMETERS
Switch Name:
MALICIOUS CALL TRACE PARAMETERS
Apply MCT Warning Tone? n MCT Voice Recorder Trunk Group:
SEND ALL CALLS OPTIONS
Send All Calls Applies to: station
Auto Inspect on Send All Calls? n
UNIVERSAL CALL ID
Create Universal Call ID (UCID)? n UCID Network Node ID:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
229Printer Translations (Switch)
Use the change system-parameters maintenance command to enter the time
of day when you want the scheduled reports to print.
!CAUTION:
Do not set the time for these reports to the same time when the switch starts
its scheduled maintenance tests (usually at 1 a.m.). See the change
system-parameters maintenance screen to verify the time and to
coordinate this administration so the times do not overlap.
change system-parameters hospitality Page 2 of 3
HOSPITALITY
Dual Wakeups? y Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup? y
VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes: 5
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones? y
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report: 12:00:am
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report: 12:30:am
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report: 12:45:am
Announcement Type: silence
Length of Time to Remain Connected to Announcement: 30
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages: 399
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice Synthesis:
Display Room Information in Call Display? n
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers? y
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers? y
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix? n
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path: 3
Digit to Insert/Delete:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
230Printer Translations (Switch)
In the example below, the same printer is used for journal/schedule printing and
log printing. If you have two different printers, you must administer two different
data modules, and you will assign a different extension for each printer.
NOTE:
A log printer must be administered if the “list PMS down” feature is to log
errors. If an actual log printer is not being installed, you should administer
an X in the Port field (administration without hardware) to represent the
log printer assignment.
add data-module 7850
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 7850 Name: JOURNAL PRT BCC: 2
Type: pdm COS: 15 Remote Loop-Around Test? n
Port: 01B0101 COR: 50 Secondary data module? n
ITC: restricted TN: 1 Connected to: dte
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1:
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION:
ASSIGNED MEMBER ( Station with a data extension button for this data module )
Ext Name
1:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
231Printer Translations (Switch)
Testing the Journal/PMS Log or System Printer
Using the RS232 Mini-Tester (see the Note on page 5), check the status of the
printer connection. The leads marked with an asterisk are controlled by the switch,
and the printer controls the other leads. If any of the switch leads are dark, there is
no connection.
!CAUTION:
After using a mini-tester to check data leads, you MUST remove the
mini-tester from the connection. DO NOT leave the mini-tester in-line during
actual operation.
If the link is active, the mini-tester should show the following:
The following three test results occur if the link is idle, but the reason for each
result is different.
The following will display if the link is not up; try the test journal pms command to
start the link. The printer could also be busied out; try the release journal pms
command to release the printer.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
green
green
red
green
red
green
green
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
red
green
red
red
green
red
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
232Printer Translations (Switch)
The following will display if the printer is turned off; turn on the printer power.
NOTE:
RTS will be lit on the front panel of the 7400A or 7400B. The CTS lead
shows green when used with an 8400B.
The following will display if the printer is off-line; press the on-line button on the
printer.
Another way to test the log printer connection is to create an Automatic Wakeup
call for the test room. If the printer is working, an Automatic Wakeup call request
message prints on the log printer.
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
dark
red
red
red
dark
dark
TD
RTS
DTR
RD*
CTS*
DSR*
CD*
red
red
green
green
green
red
green
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
233Parallel Printer Translations (INTUITY)
Parallel Printer Translations
(INTUITY)
For R4.4, use the Customer/Services Administration > System Management
> UNIX Management > Printer Administration > Install Printer Software
command to set up the parallel printer on the INTUITY system. This command
enables the printer port (lp1) for parallel printer operation.
For R5, use the UNIX Management > Printer Administration command to set
up the parallel printer on the INTUITY system. This command enables the printer
port (lp1) for parallel printer operation. You can select from Install Okidata 320
Printer Software or Install Okidata Laser Printer Software. Use the option that
best matches your printer model.
Customer Logins (Switch)
Customer logins cannot be added using the craft login, but you can change
passwords for existing customer logins (use list login to display the logins). If
customer logins exist, use the following screen to change the passwords to the
switch. The passwords must be three to six characters long using any
combination of 0-9, a-z, and A-Z. You should change only the logins that the
customer requests. Instruct the customer that the logins and passwords must be
kept secure to avoid security issues.
Customer Logins (INTUITY)
Use the Customer/Services Administration > System Management >
Password Administration > Assign/Change Password command to create a
password for the customer. The customer will use the “sa” login. Remind the
customer to change the password as soon as the system is turned over, and to
change it frequently. You can also set the password aging option using the
Customer/Services Administration > System Management > Password
Administration > Assign/Change Password Aging command.
change password staff1 Page 1 of 1
PASSWORD ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:
LOGIN BEING CHANGED
Login Name: staff1
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
234Security Notification (Switch)
Security Notification (Switch)
Use the change system security-parameters command to add security
notification to the switch for login, remote access, authorization code, or station
security code violations. You must enter y in the highlighted fields before the other
entry fields will display.
change system security-parameters Page 1 of 2
SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Login Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: Referral Destination:
Login Threshold: Time Interval:
Announcement Extension:
SVN Remote Access Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: Referral Destination:
Barrier Code Threshold: Time Interval:
Announcement Extension:
SVN Authorization Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: Referral Destination:
Authorization Code Threshold: Time Interval:
Announcement Extension:
change system security-parameters Page 2 of 2
SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Station Security Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: Referral Destination:
Station Security Code Threshold: Time Interval:
Announcement Extension:
STATION SECURITY CODE VERIFICATION PARAMETERS
Minimum Station Security Code Length: 4
Station Security Code for Terminal Self-Administration Required? y
ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
MGR1? n INADS? n IP? n
EPN? n NET? n
IP SAT Timeout (mins): Translation-ID Mismatch Interval (days): 5
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
235Save Translations (Switch)
Save Translations (Switch)
After you have finished all translations, tested the translations, and verified them
with the customer, save the announcements using the save announcements
command. When that is finished, save translations using the save translation
command. After saving translations, log off using the logoff command.
Create Backup (INTUITY)
Use the Customer/Services Administration > Backup/Restore > Backup
command to create a backup tape for the INTUITY. Follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Translations and Testing
236Create Backup (INTUITY)
Continuing with the Switch Installation
237Testing the Switch
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Continuing with the Switch
Installation
This section contains procedures that you must complete after you have
connected and tested the hospitality adjuncts. The procedures in this section are
fully detailed in the appropriate switch installation documents.
Testing the Switch
See the appropriate installation document for information about testing the switch:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 4 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 4 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets
.
Installing and Wiring Telephones and
Other Equipment
See the appropriate installation document for information about installing and
wiring telephones and other equipment:
■For CMC installations, see Chapters 1 and 2 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 5 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 5 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets
.
When installing the attendant consoles, see “Attendant Console Button Layouts
(Switch)” on page 106 for more information. When installing backup telephones,
see “Backup Telephone Button Layouts (Switch)” on page 116 for more
information.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Continuing with the Switch Installation
238Testing Telephones and Other Equipment
Testing Telephones and Other
Equipment
See the appropriate installation document for information about testing
telephones and other equipment:
■For CMC installations, see Chapter 1 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Compact Modular Cabinets.
■For SCC installations, see Chapter 6 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets.
■For MCC installations, see Chapter 6 of
DEFINITY ECS Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets
.
A feature now available is Station Self-Display. This feature allows you to dial a
feature access code or press the Inspect button at a display telephone to display
the extension number for that telephone. The feature is enabled using the change
system-parameters features command. The feature access code is assigned
using the change feature-access-codes command.
Customer Turnover
After you have installed and tested the switch and installed adjuncts, and have
determined that the system is operating correctly, you will turn control of the
system over to the customer. Follow your local customer turnover procedures as
determined by your distributor or as determined by the customer’s contract. This
turnover should include the following:
■Do a final save of the translations.
■Give the customer the following documentation:
— GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Hospitality Operations
—
DEFINITY ECS Documentation Library
(CD)
— INTUITY voice messaging instructions/artwork
— A copy of the dialing plan, a list of the feature access codes, and a
list of the trunk access codes
— Customer logins and passwords for the switch and the INTUITY sys-
tem.
■Show the customer how to record announcements for Automatic Wakeup
calls or the Automatic Attendant feature.
■Explain any Call Vectoring procedures that have been administered for the
Automated Attendant or Dial by Name features.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Continuing with the Switch Installation
239Maintenance
■Remind the customer to provide information about any new telephone
numbers and services to the guests, such as instructions that show guests
how to do their own Automatic Wakeup calls and Do Not Disturb requests.
The information about those features is in
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS
Hospitality Operations
.
■If the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya, tell the customer
that all trouble calls, whether they involve the switch, the INTUITY AUDIX
or INTUITY Lodging, or the INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting, should go
to 1-800-242-2121. Outside of the United States and Canada, the
customer should call their local Avaya representative.
Maintenance
Maintenance procedures for the switch are the same as for other Avaya
DEFINITY ECS products. See the appropriate maintenance document for more
information:
■
DEFINITY ECS Maintenance for R9r
■
DEFINITY ECS Maintenance for R9csi
■
DEFINITY ECS Maintenance for R9si.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Continuing with the Switch Installation
240Maintenance
Appendixes
241Maintenance
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
Additional information for technicians is provided in the following appendixes:
■Appendix A — Parts List
■Appendix B — Connector Pinouts
■Appendix C — List PMS Down Events
■Appendix D — Homisco Call Record Format
■Appendix E — Xiox Call Accounting Format.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
242Appendix A — Parts List
Appendix A — Parts List
Table 13 shows many of the parts used with the switch. Use this list as a
reference if you need to order additional or replacement parts.
Table 13. Parts List
Part Number
MAP LAN cards Model 8412
Model 8416
MAP DCIU card (GPSync) 406801647; J1P260AA, List 31
MAP Multiport Serial card (Equinox) J1P260AA1, List 39
MAP Equinox DTE 10/10 adapter, P/N:210068 406983155
MAP IVC6 (AYC10) analog voice interface
MAP IVC6A (AYC29) tip/ring interface
MAP NGTR (AYC30) next generation tip/ring interface
106406580
107213944
107224586
MAP Ferrites (required for some voice port installations) 407616846
MAP 6-pin modular cords, 3 ft. ED5P208-30, Group 16
MAP 885A connector kit
885A connecting block
RJ11C 4-wire modular cords, 25 ft.
601419666; ED5P907-70, Group 1
103732582
103A connecting block
104A connecting block 105164818
105164859
Isolating Data Interface (IDI) Unit
105C
105D 107422735
108367376
PI-to-IDI cable
10 ft.
25 ft.
50 ft.
100 ft.
200 ft.
H600-210, Group 1
H600-210, Group 2
H600-210, Group 3
H600-210, Group 4
H600-210, Group 5
IDI-to-DCIU card cable, 4.5 ft. ED1E434-11, Group 175
D6AP RJ25 6-pin modular cord
7 ft.
14 ft.
25 ft.
102937620
102937604
102937588
D8W RJ45 8-pin modular cord
7 ft.
14 ft.
25 ft.
50 ft.
75 ft.
100 ft.
103786786 or 103786778
103786802
103786828
103866109
103866125
103866141
451A in-line adapter (for linking RJ45 cables) 103786240
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
243Appendix A — Parts List
Category 5 RJ45 modular cords
5 ft.
10 ft.
15 ft.
25 ft.
50 ft.
100 ft.
200 ft.
300 ft.
107748063
107748105
107748188
107742322
107742330
107748238
107748246
107748253
Modular Adapters (50-pin to 8-pin)
259A
258B
356A
102631413
103923025
104158829
D8AM-87 crossover cord 846943306 or 104154414
D25F 5 ft. cable, plug-to-receptacle 105193668
M25A cable, plug-to-receptacle
5 ft.
9 ft.
25 ft.
50 ft.
102269602
102269610
102269628
102269636
M25B cable, plug-to-plug
4 ft.
10 ft.
25 ft.
50 ft.
102269669
102269677
102986643
846823730
B25A distribution cable
10 ft.
15 ft.
25 ft.
50 ft.
100 ft.
846300994
846301000
846301026
846301075
846301174
Null modem 407122043
7400A data module 105558050
7400B data module 106545841
7400A/7400B power supply; WP90110, L7 405509852
7400B power supply; WP91508, L5 405967696
8400B data module 407444835
Comsphere 3820 modem 107560534
9-pin to 25-pin EIA transition cable, 1 ft. 847106945; ED3G1115
RS232 Mini-Tester 407515139
Tab l e 1 3 . Parts List — Continued
Part Number
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
244Appendix B — Connector Pinouts
Appendix B — Connector Pinouts
Connections from the Equinox card on the MAP to the hospitality adjuncts (PMS
or call accounting) can often cause problems. The following list gives you the
pinouts and EIA leads provided when using a D6AP modular cord from the
Equinox card to the Equinox 10/10 adapter (P/N:210068, comcode 406983155).
These pinouts are on the 25-pin end of the adapter.
■Pin 2 - TD (transmit data)
■Pin 3 - RD (receive data)
■Pin 7 - GND (ground)
■Pin 8 - DCD (data carrier detect)
■Pin 20 - DTR (data terminal ready).
This arrangement of EIA is standard in the industry, but these pinouts may
become valuable if the adjunct vendor needs to provide a special adapter to
interface to this arrangement.
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
245Appendix C — List PMS Down Events
Appendix C — List PMS Down Events
Whenever an error occurs between the switch and the PMS, a log of the event is
kept on the switch. The following is an example of some PMS down events and
reasons.
You can use these events to troubleshoot link problems or verify link events. If
there is a log printer installed and administered on the switch, these events are
logged to that printer as they occur. If there is not a log printer, the list pms-down
command displays the events that occurred on the switch for the last 24 hours.
The list pms-down long command displays the last 100 events that occurred on
the switch, regardless of time frame. Table 14 is a listing of the events and their
meanings, and Table 15 is a listing of the reasons and their meanings.
Table 14. PMS Down Events
Event Meaning
checkin, occupied Check in confirmed; room already occupied
checkout, message Check out confirmed; messages exist
checkout, MWL off Check out confirmed; MWL off
checkout, MWL on Check out confirmed; MWL on
checkout, vacant Check out confirmed; room already vacant
cnf data link rel Confirm data link release
end data swap End of database exchange
from room, code 1 Housekeeping from room; process code 1
from room, code 2 Housekeeping from room; process code 2
from room, code 3 Housekeeping from room; process code 3
from room, code 4 Housekeeping from room; process code 4
from room, code 5 Housekeeping from room; process code 5
from room, code 6 Housekeeping from room; process code 6
from room, PMS acc PMS accepts housekeeping status change from room
from room, PMS rej PMS rejects housekeeping status change from room
from stn, code 1 Housekeeping from station; process code 1
from stn, code 2 Housekeeping from station; process code 2
list pms-down Page 1
PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ACTIVITY
Extension Event Reason Date/Time
2900 from room, code 1 active - nopms 18/20:10 PM
3100 from sta., code 2 active - nopms 18/21:00 PM
3344 checkout, MWL off PMS Link Out 18/21:25 PM
3302 room check in PMS Link Out 18/21:34 PM
3320 PBX chng stn rstr active - nopms 18/22:00 PM
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
246Appendix C — List PMS Down Events
from stn, code 3 Housekeeping from station; process code 3
from stn, code 4 Housekeeping from station; process code 4
from stn, PMS acc PMS accepts housekeeping status change from station
from stn, PMS rej PMS rejects housekeeping status change from station
gst info: complt Guest info completed
gst info: no chg Guest info no change
gst info: request Guest info request
gst info: vacant Guest info vacant
invalid PMS msg Switch received a message with either a bad feature code or
process code
MWL, another type PMS attempted clearing MWL
PBX chng stn rstr Switch changed the station’s restriction value
PBX cleared MWL Switch cleared a station’s MWL
PBX enabled MWL Switch enabled a station’s MWL
PBX room image Switch’s room data image for synchronization
PMS chng stn rstr PMS changes station’s restriction value
PMS cleared MWL PMS wants station’s MWL cleared
PMS enabled MWL PMS wants station’s MWL enabled
PMS room change Room change message from PMS
PMS room image PMS’s room data image for synchronization
PMS room swap Room swap message from PMS
req data link rel Request data link release
room ch/sw error Room change/swap data error
room checkin Room check-in
room checkout Switch is to check-out room
room data request Room data request
room data resp Room data response
start data swap Start of database exchange
status inquiry Status inquiry from PMS
status : OK Status response: OK
status : PBX init Status response: switch-initiated
status : UC Status response: uncommunicated changes
Table 14. PMS Down Events — Continued
Event Meaning
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
247Appendix C — List PMS Down Events
Table 15. PMS Down Reasons
Reason Meaning
active-nopms Feature is active, no PMS
ADX link out AUDIX link is out of service
ADX rej msg AUDIX rejected message
PBX bfr ovfl Switch buffer overflow
PBX rej msg Switch rejected message
PMS link out PMS link is out of service
PMS prot vio PMS protocol violation
PMS rej msg PMS rejected the message
rcv viol msg Received violation message
viol:bad cp Coverage path not within allowed range or equal to a special code
representing the “Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms”
viol:bad ext Extension does not exist or does not have a client room COS
viol:bad fea Invalid feature code
viol:bad fmt Message format not correct (for example, 0xff characters or 0xf
bytes not present where required)
viol:bad mw Invalid Message Waiting message
viol:bad nm At least one name character is invalid
viol:bad occ Invalid occurrence
viol:bad pro Invalid process code for the associated feature code
viol:bad res Invalid restriction level
xmt viol msg Transmitted violation message
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
248Appendix D — Homisco Call Record Format
Appendix D — Homisco Call Record
Format
This appendix provides a copy of the Homisco call record format for call
accounting. If possible, share this information with the PMS vendor before the
installation.
Call Record Format
01-- <STX>Start Of Text
02--05 Call ID
06-- Space
07--09 Hotel Identifier (3 char.)
10-- Space
11--15 Date Field
16-- Space
17--22 Extension Field (left-justified)
23--27 Time of Day (24-hour clock)
28-- Space
29--32 Duration Field
33-- Space
34--40 Price Field (including “$” and “.”)
41-- Space
42--57 Number Dialed Field (left-justified)
58-- Call Type Identifier (L=Local, F=Foreign)
59-- <ETX> End of Text
60-- Check Sum (may be disregarded)
Examples of Call Record Format
<STX>0001 PPH 08/12 1102 10:02 0004 $003.34 617-234-9876 <ETX>a
<STX>0002 PPH 08/12 303 10:16 0011 $012.56 3438754923 F<ETX>P
<STX>0003 PPH 08/12 72101 11:01 0001 $000.60 555-1212 <ETX>M
<STX>0004 PPH 08/12 1309 11:15 0006 $000.75 399-1000 L<ETX>+
<STX>0005 PPH 08/12 723 13:27 0018 $000.50 610-375-3876 <ETX>!
<STX>0006 PPH 08/12 505 13:45 0001 $000.60 411 L<ETX>8
<STX>0007 PPH 08/12 72100713:59 0003 $002.18 332-7845 <ETX>*
Message Exchange
Homisco PMS
ENQ ------------>
<---------------ACK
TEXT------------->
<-------------ACK/NAK
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
249Appendix E — Xiox Call Accounting Format
Appendix E — Xiox Call Accounting
Format
This appendix provides information about the Xiox call accounting posting
interface and format. If possible, share this information with the PMS vendor
before the installation.
Posting from the Xiox call accounting is done over an RS232 connection from
COM2 of the PC running the Xiox call accounting software to a serial port on the
PMS. The cable configuration is a standard serial cable with a null modem. When
the PC serial port connector is a standard 9-pin connector, Xiox sends on pin 3
and receives on pin 2. Xiox requires a connection on pin 5 (signal ground) and
holds pin 4 (DTR) and pin 7 (RTS) high while in the Call Processing mode. DTR
and RTS will drop when exiting Call Processing.
The following information is needed from the Property Management System
vendor:
1. What are the speed, parity, data bits, and stop bit parameters expected by
the PMS?
2. What data format is expected by the PMS? The choices are:
■0 - Hobic record with a 4-digit sequence number
■1 - Micros PMS format
■2 - Hobic record with 3-digit sequence number followed by one letter
■3 - Hobic fixed length record with 4-digit sequence number.
3. What is the initiator (start of text) character expected by the PMS? (For
example, 02 for a black happy face indicating STX.)
4. What is the terminator (end of text) character expected by the PMS? (For
example, 03 for a black heart indicating ETX.)
5. Is the PMS capable of handshaking? If so, what character is expected by
the PMS for Acknowledge and Negative Acknowledge? (For example, 06
for ACK, and 21 for NAK.)
6. Is a Block Check Character (BCC) or check sum expected by the PMS?
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Appendixes
250Appendix E — Xiox Call Accounting Format
The following is a sample of Format 0 (Hobic with 4-digit sequence number):
0001 HTL 02/29 501 13:32 0009 $002.50 650-555-1212
The following table describes this format:
Position Length Description
1 4 Message Sequence Number - right justified, 0 filled
6 3 Property Name Acronym - up to 3 alpha characters speci-
fied by the user
10 5 Date - MM/DD
16 5 Extension Number - left justified, space filled
22 5 Call Start Time - HH:MM
28 4 Duration in Minutes - right justified, 0 filled
33 7 Price - fixed format, 0 filled
41 14 Dialed Digits - variable length field consisting of a dialed
digit string of up to 12 characters
Index
251
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
IN
Index
Numerics
103A Modular Connecting Blocks,26
105C IDI,22
105D IDI,22
3820 Modem,75
7400A Data Module Options,49, 57, 64
7400B Data Module Options,50, 58, 65
8400B Data Module Options,48, 56, 63
885A Connector Kit,26
A
Abbreviated Dialing,103, 108
About This Handbook,xi
Activate the Switch,12
Adjunct Supervision,184
Alerting,111
Analog Caller ID,124
Announcements,133
ASCII Mode,209
Attendant Backup,110, 113, 116
Attendant Call Pickup,116
Attendant Console,105, 106
Permissions,89
Queue Priority,112
Attendant Split Swap,107
AUDIX Subscribers,120
Automated Attendant,1, 150
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers,143
Automatic Wakeup Options,148
B
Backup on INTUITY,235
Backup Telephone,116
Billing Considerations for Faxes,102
Bus Bridge,13, 158
Button Layout
Attendant Console,106
Telephones,116
Buttons
Attendant Call Pickup,116
Automatic Wakeup,108
Automatic Wakeup Printer Alarm,108
CDR Alarm,108
Check-In,108
Check-Out,108
Controlled Restrictions,108
Coverage Message Retrieval,109
Buttons, (continued)
Crisis Alert,108
Date/Time,109
Delete Message,109
DID View,107
Directory,108
Display,109
Do Not Disturb,108
Failed Wakeups,108, 116
Forced Release,108
Hold,107
Inspect,109
Maid Status,108
Message Waiting Activation,107, 116
Message Waiting Deactivation,107, 116
Next,109
Night Service,108
Normal,109
Occupied Rooms,108
PMS Alarm,108
PMS Printer Alarm,108
Position Busy,108
Split,107
Split Swap,107
System Printer Alarm,108
Timer,109
Translations,106
Trunk ID,108
VIP Retry,108
VIP Wakeup,108
C
Cabling
Hospitality Adjuncts,15
INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting-to-PMS,51
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS,30
MAP Remote Access,75
Mode Code Integration,25
Overall Connectivity,17
Parallel Printers,71
Serial Printers,61
Switch-to-Call Accounting,35, 39, 43
Switch-to-Call Accounting with Data
Modules,46
Switch-to-INADS,72
Switch-to-INTUITY (Mode Code
Signaling),24
Switch-to-INTUITY (TCP/IP),19
Switch-to-INTUITY (X.25),22
Switch-to-INTUITY Voice Ports,25
Switch-to-PMS,54
Voice Ports,25
Xiox Call Accounting-to-PMS,53
Call Accounting,207
Link Parameters,205
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Index
252
Call Forwarding,90
Guest Message Retrieval,189
Call Record Format
Homisco,248
Xiox,249
Call Vectoring,150, 153, 238
Caller ID,124
Message Waiting Indication,125
Calls in Queue Warning,110
CDR,35, 39, 43, 142, 205, 206
Reports,142, 206
Translations,205
Center of Excellence,13, 74, 83
Check-In/Check-Out,222
Checklist
Installation,4
Miscellaneous Translations,81
Switch-to-INTUITY Translations,157
Translations,80
C-LAN,21
Class of Restriction,91
Class of Service,89, 98
Client Room,89, 90
Coverage Path Configuration,208
Comsphere 3820,75
Connector Pinouts,244
Console,105
Permissions,90
Controlled Restrictions,108, 215, 226
Configuration,208
Testing,226
Translations,215
Conventions,xii
Country Options,13
Coverage Path Configuration,208
Coverage Paths,189
Crisis Alert,108, 138
ARS Pattern,138, 139
Button Assignment,108
Display Telephone,140
Every User Responds,140
Pager,140
Translations,138
Crossover Cable,20
Crossover Wiring,21
Custom Selection of DID Numbers,143
Customer
Documentation,238
Logins,233
Service Document,9
Turnover,238
D
Daily Wakeup,148
Data Modules,48, 49, 50, 56, 57, 58, 63, 64,
65, 213
Data Privacy,90
Database Swap,221
Date and Time,13, 82
Daylight Savings Time Rules,13
Default Language,197, 199
Default Translation Card,12
DEFINITY Site Administration,8, 11
Delete Digit,210
Dial by Name,83, 153
Dial Plan,84, 85
First Digit,84
Second Digit,84
DID Numbers,143
Digit Deletion,210
Digit Insertion,210
Digit to Insert/Delete,84, 210
Digital Line Circuit Packs,18
Display Calling Number for Room to Room Caller
ID Calls,124
Display Room Information in Call Display,123
Displaying a Telephone’s Extension,238
Distinctive Audible Alerting,184
Dual Wakeup,148
Duplicate Command,121, 185
E
Emergency Access Redirection Extension,137
Emergency Access to Attendant,137
Equinox Pinouts,244
Equipment Layout,7
Equipment Room,7
Ethernet Data Module,161
Extension of Journal/Schedule Printer,228
Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC
Messages,148
External Alert Port,110
F
Failed Wakeup Button,108, 116
Failed Wakeup Messages,148
Fax Billing Considerations,102
Fax Extension,192
Fax Parameters,101
Faxes Forwarded from Guest Mailbox,102
Feature Access Codes,86
Feature Overview,1
Ferrites,26
Floor Plan,7
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging,196,
198
Forwarding Faxes,102
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Index
253
G
Guest
Information Display,123
Mailboxes,132, 203
Message Retrieval,188
Rooms,121
GuestWorks Interface Link,196
H
Hardware Options,xiii
Homisco,6, 15, 35, 46, 113, 205, 248
Hospitality
Customer Options,14
Parameters,208
Housekeeper
ID Digits,214
Information Configuration,208
Housekeeping Status
Testing,227
Translations,213
Hunt Groups,186
Hunt-To Stations,127
I
ICLID,124
IDI,23
INADS,73, 74, 75
Alarm Origination,77
Insert Digit,210
Insert/Delete Digit,84, 210
Installation
Cabinet,9
Checklist,4
Management Interface,10
Overview,3
Telecommunications Cabling,10
Telephones and Other Equipment,237
Integrated Link,196
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting,15, 35, 51,
71, 113, 205
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS Link
Testing,207
Translations,207
INTUITY Lodging Voice Messaging,15
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link
Testing,201
Translations,195
INTUITY System Parameters,99
IP Addresses,159, 165
IP Interfaces,160
IP Routes,163
Isolating Data Interface,23
J
Journal/Log Printers
Testing,69, 231
Translations,228
Journal/Schedule Printer,16, 62
Journal/Schedule Printer Endpoint,228
L
Lamps On For New Messages,132, 199
LAN Circuit Card,166
Languages,197, 199
Layout,7
LDG,200
LEDs,121
Link Integration,196
List PMS Down Events,245
Listed Directory Numbers,100, 104
Log Printer,16, 62
Logical Channel,178, 179
Logins,233
Lost PMS Messages,209
LWC Activation,184
LWC Reception,184
M
Maid Status
Testing,227
Translations,213
Mailboxes
Guest Room,132
Office Staff Subscribers,120
Maintenance,239
Management Interface,10
Mapping Phone Numbers to Services,192
Message Center,187
Message Lamp Control,199
Message Retrieval,188
Message Waiting
Configuration,208
Indicator,121
Testing,223
Mini-Tester,5
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link,33, 201
Journal/Log Printers,69
Printers,231
Switch-to-Call Accounting Link,37, 41, 44
Switch-to-PMS Link,59, 217
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Index
254
Mode Code Integration,2, 24, 25, 30, 181, 195
Modems,75
N
Neon Lamps,121
Netcon,212
Testing,219
Translations,212
No Answer Timeout,111
Node Names,159
Number of Digits From PMS,210
Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Atten-
dant Queue,137
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits,214
O
Offer Categories,1
Off-hook Alert,90, 137
Okidata Model ML321T Printer Options,66, 67
Okidata Printers,7, 61
Options
572 Printer,66, 67
7400A for Call Accounting,49
7400A for PMS,57
7400A for Printers,64
7400B for Call Accounting,50
7400B for PMS,58
7400B for Printers,65
8400B for Call Accounting,48
8400B for PMS,56
8400B for Printers,63
Okidata Printers,66, 67
P
Packet Gateway,23
Paradyne,76
Parallel Printers,71
Translations,233
Parts,5, 242
Passwords,14, 193, 233
Administrator,193
Attendant,193
craft,12
PBX Extension to Channel,190
Phone Number Mapping,192
Ping,169
Pinouts,244
PMS
ASCII Mode,209
Communication Parameters,57
Down,245
Event IDs on the INTUITY,202
Integration Parameters,199
Link Acknowledgement Timeout,209
Link Maximum Retransmission
Requests,209
Link Maximum Retransmissions,209
Link Parameters,209
Status,220
Take Down Link for Lost Messages,209
Testing,220
PMS Endpoint,208
PMS Log Printer Endpoint,228
Prefixed Extensions,210
Printer
Communication Parameters,64
Options,66, 67
Parallel,71
System,16
Translations,228
Processor
Channels,162, 176
Interface,174
Interface Link,23, 174, 177
Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals,124
Protocol Mode,209
Q
Queue Length,186
Queue Priority,112
R
Reasons for Issue,xii
Reboot INTUITY,168
Recorded Announcements,133
Related Documents,xiii
Remote Maintenance Board,75
Reports,229
Room Status Definitions,214
Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice
Synthesis,149
S
Saving Translations,79, 235
Scheduling Reports,229
Security Notification,234
Services to Channels,190
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Index
255
Site Planning,6
Software Packages,xiii
Special Applications,83
Speech Synthesizer Circuit Packs,136
Split Swap,107
Standalone Interface Link,198
Station Hunt Before Coverage,126
Station Hunting,127
Station Self-Display,238
Stations
Guest Rooms,121
Office Staff,113
Subscribers,120
Suite Check-In,126
Support Helpline,239
Switch Interface on INTUITY,167
Switch Port,168, 178, 179
Switch Tests,237
Switch Type,167
Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration,30, 196,
198
Switchhook Flash,183, 184
Switch-to-Call Accounting Link
Testing,37, 41, 44, 206
Translations,205
Switch-to-INTUITY Link
Testing,194
Translations,157
Switch-to-PMS Link
Testing,59, 216
Translations,208
System Parameters,99
System Printer
Testing,231
Translations,228
T
TAAS,110
Tape Backup,235
TCP/IP on INTUITY,165
TCP/IP Signaling,19, 158
Technical Support,239
Xiox,6
Telephones,238
Test Equipment,5
Testing,79
7400A,219
8400B,219
Call Accounting Records,207
Check-in/Check-out,222
Controlled Restrictions,226
Database Swap,221
Housekeeping Status,227
INTUITY Lodging Call Accounting-to-PMS
Link,207
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS Link,201
Testing, (continued)
Journal/Log Printers,69, 231
Message Waiting,223
Netcon,219
Ping,169
PMS,220
Switch-to-Call Accounting Link,33, 37, 41,
44, 206
Switch-to-INTUITY Link,194
Switch-to-PMS Link,59, 216
System Printer,231
TCP/IP Link,169
Telephones and Other Equipment,238
Voice Mailboxes,203
Voice Ports,194
X.25 Link,179
Time and Date,13, 82
Tip/Ring Card,25
TN799B,21
Toll Restriction,215
Training,xi
Translation Card,12
Translations,79
Abbreviated Dialing,103
Attendant Backup,110
Attendant Console,105
Attendant Crisis Alert,138
Automated Attendant,150
Billable Features,83
Billing for Forwarded Faxes,102
Bus Bridge,13, 158
Buttons
Attendant Console,106
Backup Telephone,116
Call Accounting Link Parameters,205
Call Forwarding for Guest Message
Retrieval,189
Call Vectoring,150
CDR Parameters,205
Checklist,80
Class of Restriction,91
Class of Service,89, 98
Console,105
Queue Priority,112
Controlled Restrictions,215
Country Options,13
Coverage Paths,189
Data Modules,213
Date and Time,13, 82
Daylight Savings Time Rules,13
Default Language,199
Dial Plan,84, 85
Emergency Access to Attendant,137
Ethernet Data Module,161
Fax Extension,192
Feature Access Codes,86
Guest Message Retrieval,188
Guest Room Mailboxes,132
GuestWorks and DEFINITY ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743 Issue 1
November 2000
Index
256
Translations, (continued)
Hospitality
Customer Options,14
Parameters,208
Housekeeping Status,213
Hunt Groups,186
INTUITY Lodging Call
Accounting-to-PMS,207
INTUITY Lodging-to-PMS,195
INTUITY System Parameters,99
IP Addresses,159, 165
IP Interfaces,160
IP Routes,163
LAN Circuit Card,166
Languages,197, 199
Listed Directory Numbers,100, 104
Logins,233
Mailboxes,120, 132
Miscellaneous,81
Mode Code Signaling,181
Multiple locations,13
Netcon,212
Node Names,159
Parallel Printers,233
PBX Extension to Channel,190
Phone Number Mapping,192
Processor Channels,162, 176
Processor Interface Link,174
Reboot INTUITY,168
Recorded Announcements,133
Saving Translations,14, 235
Serial Printer,228
Services to Channels,190
Services to Phone Number Mapping,192
Stations,113
Subscribers,120
Switch Interface on INTUITY,167, 178, 179
Switch Type,167, 177
Switch/INTUITY/PMS Link Integration,196,
198
Switch-to-Call Accounting,205
Switch-to-INTUITY,157
Switch-to-PMS,208
System Printer Endpoint,228
TCP/IP on INTUITY,165
TCP/IP Signaling,158
Trunk Groups,142
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer,156
Voice Ports,183
Wakeup Options,148
X.25 Data Module,174
X.25 Signaling,174
Trunk Groups,142
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer,156
V
VIP Wakeup,148
Voice Mailboxes,203
Voice Ports,25, 183, 190
Hunt Groups,186
Status,194
Testing,194
Translations,183, 190
W
Wakeup Activation via Tones,148
Wakeup Options,148
X
X.25 Signaling,22, 174
Xiox,6, 15, 39, 46
Posting Interface and Format,249
Technical Support,6
We’d like your opinion.
We welcome your feedback on this document. Your comments can be of great value in helping us
improve our documentation.
GuestWorks® and DEFINITY® ECS Release 9
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations
555-231-743, Issue 1, November 2000
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas:
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document:
Please add details about your concern.__________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. What did you like most about this document?___________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.____________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:_________________________________________Telephone Number: ( )
Company/Organization______________________________________Date:___________________
Address:________________________________________________________________________
When you have completed this form, please FAX to +1-303-538-1741. Thank you.
Excellent Good Fair Poor
Ease of Finding
Information
Clarity
Completeness
Accuracy
Organization
Appearance
Examples
Illustrations
Overall Satisfaction
❒Improve the overview/introduction ❒Make it more concise
❒Improve the table of contents ❒Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
❒Improve the organization ❒Add more troubleshooting information
❒Add more figures ❒Make it less technical
❒Add more examples ❒Add more/better quick reference aids
❒Add more detail ❒Improve the index